Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout525 N Palmetto AvePermit Job Address — u� CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Date;, RECEIVED AUG 31.'2009 � ___Wm Description of Work: Historic District: _ Zoning: Y Value of Work:OF Permit Types Building Electrical— Mechanical Plumbing _ 'Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS _ Additonl:4lteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential - Repli&ffient New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures ....... # of Water.:& Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial _ Total Sqaare Footage: Construction Type: # of Storim_ # of Dwelling Units: flood zone: ___ ._ . (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel t+: (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Owners Name & Address; In ✓wa 16 -+ w f13Phonp: Contractor Name & Addre 1t- .Z.Se ZC J State Liege Number: j Phone & Fax: Conte t Penoa: �3gt _ Phone:, Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender.- Address: ender:Address: Architect/Engineer: Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work And installations as indicated. I "rtify that no work or installation has commenced ptior to the issuance of a permit And that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a Separate permit must_be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFI/1_V_LT; I cdrtify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating con_atruction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY_ IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT, NP_X10E: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this County, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such nagcment distriCM state agencies, or federal agencies. ' Acceptance of permit is verification that 1 will notify the owner of the property of the uirements of FI Lien Law, FS Azw aoo5 Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signa re of Contractor t Date Print Owncr/Agent's Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced ID - APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Btde; Toning; (initial & Date) Special Conditions; g_. t Contractor/Agent's Name Signature of Notary- tate of Florida Contractor/Agent is �! Personally KAo - _ Produced ID Utilities; (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) a 9/ civ 5 SHANNON LYNN ;Notary PL01c: - State of Florida AVCanrlbelort6g>reSNb✓29,� Commission #i DD300M i 'fgie``b'r 9ordedbVNa1lonalNolnryAnm FD;1 J (Initial & Date) 1 Go City of Sanford City Hall 300 N. Park Ave Sanford, Fl 32771 Re: Release of Authorization Dear Sir or Madam: Phone 407-330-5600 Fax 407-330-5679 Please utilize this letter as authorization to allow the following personnel to act on my behalf with regards to pulling permits under my State of Florida issued pre-engineered system license. Darren McKee Byron Starling Should you wish to speak to me concerning this matter, please feel free to contact me via cellular at 904.251.5869 or my office at 813.621.6094. Michael Kn ichael.knear ebarkerfiresafe Region Manager / License Holder Pye-Barker Fire & Safety, Inc. State of Florida County of Orange Sworn before me this aki—day of August 2005 Mr. Ralph Michael Knear who appeared before me and is personally known and has not taken an oath. Shannon Lynn P,SHANNON WM -+� ;Nota►y Public - Sk to of flakla My commission expires: �i -Db' ^�0^ .� •�,,µa # ft bV:!t �NofoiyMtm Cc: file 9203 King Palm Drive - Suite D - Tampa - FL 33619 (813) 621-6094 - Fax (813) 628-4661 www.pyebarkerfiresafety.com NOTE: ALL PIPING IN 3/8' SCH, 40 BLACK PIPE EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN ON, MAKEUP AIR, GAS AND ALL ELECTRIC TO SHUT -DOWN ON SYSTEM ACTUATION. NOZZEL PLACEMENT MEETS ANSUL UL300 CRITERIA FUSE LINKS TO BE DETERMINED BY INSTALLER GAS VALVE REQUIRED HOOD #1 11'-6' (1381) DUCT1 24' X 12' (72") HOOD #2 8'-0' (96') DUCT 16' X 12' (56') EQUIPMENT LEGE LABEL �DESCRII A FRYER B CHAR -BROILER C GRIDDLE D RANGE 3 IF 419344 1 3 3N 419349 1 3 1 1 SWIVEL NOZZLES1 423572 1 - NOTE: ALL PIPING IN 3/8' SCH, 40 BLACK PIPE EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN ON, MAKEUP AIR, GAS AND ALL ELECTRIC TO SHUT -DOWN ON SYSTEM ACTUATION. NOZZEL PLACEMENT MEETS ANSUL UL300 CRITERIA FUSE LINKS TO BE DETERMINED BY INSTALLER GAS VALVE REQUIRED HOOD #1 11'-6' (1381) DUCT1 24' X 12' (72") HOOD #2 8'-0' (96') DUCT 16' X 12' (56') SUPPLY # 1 22 FLOW POINTS LEGEND QTY DESCRIPTION PART # FLOW PT. 2 2W 419348 2 6 1N 419346 1 3 IF 419344 1 3 3N 419349 1 3 1 1 SWIVEL NOZZLES1 423572 1 - 6,0 GAL. ANSUL SYSTEM TOTAL 22 FLOW POINTS HOOD #1 HOOD #2 ----------------138.0---------------- ---- --- ------108.0------------� CJ C7 Cn CC OP oP Ci CC C� oP I I 1 ��----- - - - - - - - - -0 46.0 I I I I I I I I I T7.0 -,�'12,0,1�--28.0--�-19.0-�--30,0-- O � 11Y All W/S I I o® 4 Q o 0 jy'x21'I 2-q SaZO 2qA 361 !qXZ) tgX2-1 f9yEK 046iZID&f 906E FleY1 (lzyti� �&/"pz REMOTE PULL STATION 19ve Z 77/ TMF- PALMS 2 RIVERWALK SANFORD, FL ANSUL FIRE SYSTEM AM 6/22/05 40958 MAINLINE REV. DATE REV. -W.' SHLET 1 OF i s This manual is intended for use with Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems. Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire sup- pression systems should read this entire manual. Specific sec- tions will be of particular interest depending upon one's responsibilities. Design, installation, recharge, and maintenance of the system must conform to the limitations detailed in this manual and per- formed by an individual who attended an Ansul training program and became trained to install, recharge, design, and maintain the Ansul system. ANSUL, ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSULEX are trademarks of Ansul Incorporated or its affiliates. Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. They need A periodic care. Maintenance is a vital step in the performance of z ' , your)fire suppression system. As such it must be performed in 0 raderdance with NFPA 96 (Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A (Standard _...._:•:,.,onfWet Chemical Extinguishing Systems) by an authorized Ansul +_ distributor. To provide maximum assurance that the fire suppres- °' 4,slbh isystem will operate effectively and safely, maintenance must >< be,conducted at six-month intervals, or earlier if the situation dic- tates.,,,Twelve-year maintenance must include agent tank hydro - r M `; statjc testing. w ANSUL PART NO. 418087-07 ANSUL, ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSULEX are trademarks of Ansul Incorporated or its affiliates. A NOTE: Latest manual revision includes all pages dated 7-1-98 except as noted below k REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 10-1-02 REV.8 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 8-1-01 2-1 2 10-1-02 4-6 4 8-1-01 2-2 3 10-1-02 4-7 3 8-1-01 5-1 4 10-1-02 4-8 5 8-1-01 5-14 2 10-1-02 4-9 6 8-1-01 5-15 2 10-1-02 4-10 5 8-1-01 5-20 2 10-1-02 4-11 6 8-1-01 5-21 -2 10-1-02 4-12 5 8-1-01 5-22 2 10-1-02 4-13 4 8-1-01 5-23 3 10-1-02 4-14 5 8-1-01 5-27 Deleted 10-1-02 4-15 4 10-1-02 1-1 3 10-1-02 4-16 5 10-1-02 1-2 3 10-1-02 4-17 5 10-1-02 3-1 3 10-1-02 4-18 5 10-1-02 3-2 3 10-1-02 4-19 3 10-1-02 3-3 6 10-1-02 4-20 4 10-1-02 3-4 5 10-1-02 4-21 3 10-1-02 3-5 4 10-1-02 4-22 3 10-1-02 3-6 4 10-1-02 4-23 5 10-1-02 3-7 4 10-1-02 4-24 5 10-1-02 3-8 5 10-1-02 4-25 6 10-1-02 3-9 2 10-1-02 4-26 5 10-1-02 3-10 1 10-1-02 4-27 4 10-1-02 4-1 5 10-1-02 4-28 3 10-1-02 4-2 3 10-1-02 4-29 3 1-0-1-02 4-3 4 10-1-02 4-30 3 10-1-02 4-4 4 10-1-02 4-31 5 10-1-02 4-5 3 10-1-02 4-32 4 ► Indicates revised information. REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 REV. 2 10-1-02 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 10-1-02 4-33 5 10-1-02 5-5 4 10-1-02 4-34 5 10-1-02 5-6 2 10-1-02 4-35 3 10-1-02 5-7 3 10-1-02 4-36 2 10-1-02 5-18 4 10-1-02 4-37 3 10-1-02 5-19 4 10-1-02 4-38 4 10-1-02 5-24 3 10-1-02 4-39 - 3 10-1-02 5-25 3 10-1-02 4-40 2 10-1-02 5-26 3 10-1-02 4-41 2 10-1-02 6-3 2 10-1-02 4-42 3 10-1-02 6-4 2 10-1-02 4-43 3 10-1-02 7-2 4 10-1-02 4-44 3 10-1-02 7-3 3 10-1-02 4-45 1 10-1-02 8-1 6 10-1-02 4-46 3 10-1-02 8-2 2 10-1-02 4-47 2 10-1-02 8-3 3 10-1-02 4-48 2 10-1-02 8-4 4 10-1-02 4-49 2 10-1-02 8-5 3 10-1-02 4-50 2 10-1-02 8-6 4 10-1-02 4-51 2 10-1-02 8-7 3 10-1-02 4-52 1 10-1-02 8-8 1 10-1-02 4-53 1 10-1-02 9-1 5 10-1-02 4-54 1 10-1-02 9-2 5 10-1-02 4-55 1 10-1-02 9-3 5 10-1-02 4-56 1 10-1-02 9-4 7 10-1-02 5-2 3 10-1-02 9-5 5 10-1-02 5-2.1 4 10-1-02 9-6 4 10-1-02 5-4 4 10-1-02 9-6.1 3 Indicates revised information. REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3 10-1-02 DATE PAGE REV. NO. - DATE PAGE REV. NO. 10-1-02 9-6.2 2 10-1-02 9-7 3 10-1-02 9-8 3 10-1-02 9-9 3 10-1-02 9-10 3 10-1-02 9-10.1 1 10-1-02 9-10.2 1 10-1-02 9-11 5 10-1-02 9-12 3 10-1-02 9-13 Deleted 10-1-02 9-14 Deleted 10-1-02 9-15 Deleted 10-1-02 9-16 Deleted . Indicates revised information. -- .2 Ir, TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 10-1-02 REV.6 SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES I. GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1 —1-2 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1-3-10 DESIGN AND APPLICATION 1-1 (Continued) UL LISTING 1.1 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES 3-9 DEFINITION OF TERMS 1-1 — 1-2 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 3-9 REGULATOR TEST KIT 3-10 II. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2-1-2-2 FUSIBLE LINK 3-10 TOTAL SYSTEM 2-1 Single -Tank 2-1 MAXIMUM REGISTERING 3-10 Double -Tank 2-1 THERMOMETER Multiple -Tank 2-2 BURSTING DISC 3-10 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 —3-10 NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE 3-10 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATOR HOSE 3-10 EXTINGUISHING AGENT 3-1 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 - IV. SYSTEM DESIGN 4-1-4-56 RELEASE ASSEMBLY NOZZLE PLACEMENT 4-1-4-31 (MECHANICAL) REQUIREMENTS "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 Duct Protection 4-1-4-4 RELEASE ASSEMBLY Electrostatic Precipitator 4-4 (ELECTRICAL) Protection SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE 3-2 Plenum Protection 4-5-4-6 ASSEMBLY Appliance Protection RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3-2 Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection 4-7-4-9 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 4-10-4-12 REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-2 Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan 4-12 ASSEMBLY Range Protection 4-13-4-16 AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY 3-2 Griddle Protection 4-17-4-21 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET 3-3 Chain Broiler Protection 4-22 ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM Overhead Chain Broiler Protection 4-22-4-23 IN -CABINET USE ONLY) Upright/Salamander Broiler 4-23 Protection OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-3 Electric Char -Broiler Protection 4-24 ASSEMBLY Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler 4-24 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 3-3 . Protection 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE 3-3 Lava -Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler 4-25 ASSEMBLY Protection Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection 4-25 ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLY 3-4 Alternate Ceramic/Natural 4-26 GAS CARTRIDGES 3-4 Charcoal Char -Broiler Protection Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Protection 4-26 NOZZLES 3-5 ` Wok Protection 4-27 SWIVEL ADAPTOR 3-5 Nozzle Application Chart 4-28-4-31 RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAP 3-5 Specific Application by Model 4-32-4-39 METAL BLOW -OFF CAP 3-5 TANK AND CARTRIDGE 4-40 REQUIREMENTS CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY 3-6 ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT 4-40-4-42 "QUIK-SEAL"ADAPTOR 3-6 GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS "COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-6 DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4-42-4-49 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-6 REQUIREMENTS ASSEMBLY General Piping Requirements 4-42 Supply and Branch Line 4-43-4-44 DETECTORS 3-7 Identification PULLEY ELBOWS 3-7 1.5 Gallon System 4-45 PULLEY TEE 3-8 3.0 Gallon System 4-46 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System 4-47-4-48 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE 3-8 9.0 Gallon System 4-49 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 3-8 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES 3-8 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES 3-9 MANUAL RESET RELAY 3-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 REV. 5 10-1-02 SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) 6-1 VII. RECHARGE AND RESETTING 7-1-7-4 DETECTION SYSTEM 4-50-4-51 PROCEDURES REQUIREMENTS 6-2 CLEANUP PROCEDURES 7-1 Detector Identification 4-50 Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity 4-50 RECHARGE 7-1-7-3 Detector Placement Requirements 4-50-4-51 RESETTING 7-3-7-4 Detection Line Requirements 4-51 REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 7-4 Fusible Link Selection 4-51 MANUAL PULL STATION 4-52 VIII. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8-1 —8-8 REQUIREMENTS SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE 8-1 —8-3 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 4-52-4-53 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE 8-4-8-8 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 4-53 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS Approvals 4-53 IX. APPENDIX 9-1-9-12 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 4-53 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE 9-1-9-4 REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX 9-5-9-6.2 ELECTRICAL SWITCH 4-53-4-56 PARTS LISTS 9-7-9-10.2 REQUIREMENTS MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER 9-11 V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 —5-26 PROTECTION CALCULATION EXAMPLES MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS 5-1 —5-2.2 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION 5-3-5-6 AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION 5-7 PIPING INSTALLING THE DETECTION 5-8-5-17 SYSTEM Installing "Clip -on" Style Linkage 5-8-5-12 "Scissors" Style Linkage Installation 5-12-5-15 Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 5-15-5-17 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5-18-5-19 PULL STATION INSTALLING MECHANICAL 5-19-5-22 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-23 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-24 SWITCHES WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED 5-25 RELEASE ASSEMBLY VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 6-1 — 6-4 TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1 VALVES TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2 VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6-3 DESIGN AND APPLICATION The Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli- ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered group of mechan- ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized Ansul distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulat- ed release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridges, liquid agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire suppres- sion system arrangement. The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is also capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. For appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current version of NFPA 17A, "Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems;' and NFPA 96, "Standard For Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations." Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and elec- trical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. Accessories can be added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to installations where required. The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area, the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with a predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the hot grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap -like foam on the surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the hot grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the escape of combustible vapors. Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid agent through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire suppression process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the plenum and duct after the fire suppression system has been discharged. The system is UL listed with or without fan operation. It is also recommended that make up or supply air fans, integral to the exhaust hood(s) being protected, should be shut down upon system actuation. ►Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress a fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Refer to NFPA 10, "Standard For Portable Fire Extinguisher," for additional ► information. UL LISTING The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-engi- neered system. The system is in compliance with UL Test ► Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char -broilers, woks, upright broilers, chain -broilers, filters, plenum chambers, hoods, and ducts after pre -loading each appliance with a pre- scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is actuated. SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1-1 10-1-02 REV.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS Actuation Gas Line: Piping from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly which supplies nitrogen or carbon dioxide to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple -tank sys- tem actuation. Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical): An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid, and electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechani- cal): An assembly which contains the regulated release mecha- nism, agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdiction" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for "approving" equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The phrase "Authority Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad manner since jurisdictions and "approval' agencies vary as do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the "authority having jurisdiction" may be a federal, state, local, or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department, health department, building official, electrical inspector, or others having statutory authority. For insurance pur- poses, an insurance company representative may be the "author- ity having jurisdiction." In many circumstances the property owner or his designated agent assumes the role of the "authority having jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding officer or departmental official may be the "authority having jurisdiction." Blow -Off Cap: A cap which covers the end of the nozzle tip and prevents grease from plugging the nozzle orifice. Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the supply line to the nozzle(s). Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which elimi- nates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme tem- perature variations. Cartridge: A sealed, steel pressure vessel containing nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank. Cooking Appliance: Includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char -broilers (electric, lava rock, gas -radiant, or mesquite). Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum surface that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a defined cooking area. For example, the maximum cooking area is the fry - pot for a fryer without a dripboard and the maximum cooking area is the combined frypot and dripboard for a fryer with a dripboard. Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre -formed piece of conduit which can be installed between the Ansul regulated release and the con- duit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient manner. SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued) Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appliance or plenum. Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire suppression system. Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link. Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing agent from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply or Branch lines. Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the hood above the filters. Pre-engineered System: NFPA 17A defines a pre-engineered system as one which has "...predetermined flow rates, nozzle pressures, and quantities of liquid agent:' The R-102 system, as prescribed by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), has specific pipe sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit- tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected by this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by UL based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards thatcan be protected and piping and nozzle configurations are contained in the R-102 installation and maintenance manual which is part of Ducts (or Duct System). A continuous passageway for the trans- the UL listing. mission of air and vapors which, in addition to the containment Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire components themselves, may include duct fittings, plenums, rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and and/or other items or air handling equipment. the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the mechan- ical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism and the Electrostatic Precipitator' A device used to aid inthe,cleaning of r; 'remote manual pull station. the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the base of the ventilation duct. Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the nitro- gen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release assembly/ regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank. Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks needed to cover a certain group of hazards. Fusible Links: A form of fixed temperature heat detecting device employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until its designed temperature is reached. Gas Valve: A device used to shut off the gas supply to the cook- ing equipment when the system is actuated. Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve to close upon system actuation. High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and cap- ture grease -laden vapors and exhaust gases. It shall be construct- ed in a manner which meets the requirements of NFPA 96. Liquid Agent: A potassium -based solution used for the knock- down and suppression of fire. Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum dimen- sion, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle. Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit- tings which must not be exceeded for each system. Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a griddle, range, or fryer. Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a spe- cific flow rate and stream pattern. Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actuator to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated releases or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve or from one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas valves. Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains the regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pressurize additional agent tanks in a multiple tank sys- tem. Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a remote pull station. Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the nitro- gen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is actuated. Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual actuation of the system from a remote location. Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the upright broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling of meats and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most contain a removable grease drip tray. Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch lines. Series Detector: Any detector located in-line between the regu- lated release assembly and the terminal detector. Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single -detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates:' There is only one terminal detector per detection system. Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct. Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within the agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature fluctuations. f N �r f t TOTAL SYSTEM There are three types of R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems: 1. Single -tank System 2. Double -tank System 3. Multiple -tank System The type of system required for the particular installation will be determined through the guidelines covered in "System Design." Additional equipment which may be required to complete the sys- tem design is explained in the "System Components" section. Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull stations, mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, electrical switches, and pressure switches. Single -Tank System The R-102 single -tank sy9tem is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 4. Discharge Nozzles 5. Detection Components 6. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release ► mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection system and additional equipment. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descrip- tions. FIGURE 1 000,37 SECTION 11 — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2-1 8-1-01 REV 2 Double -Tank System The R-102 double -tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant ' 4. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly 5. Discharge Nozzles 6. Detection Components 7. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release ► mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip- ment. ► The enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual com- ponent descriptions. 1-5 D FIGURE 2 OW133 _7 SECTION II — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2-2 REV.3 8-1-01 TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued) Multiple -Tank System The R-102 multiple -tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s) 3. Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies) 4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant ► 5. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies) 6. Discharge Nozzles 7. Detection Components 8. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release ► mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but with- in the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actuation/ expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actua- tion of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic actuator, ►regulator, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant piping. ►Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or regulat- ed actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. ,t FIGURE 3 OW175 EXTINGUISHING AGENT ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon - Part No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon — Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based solu- tion designed for fast knock -down and suppression of grease - related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which pro- vide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation record. "ANSULEX" LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT 3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 35 LB. (16 kg) SHIPPING 9 LB. (9 kg) 16 000137 FIGURE 1 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly (Part No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knock- outs to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec- tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can be used to interconnect both the actuation and expellant gas lines as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (759 kPa) when the system is actuated. The agent tank must be ordered separately. In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel- lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In double and multiple -tank system configurations, the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for one additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket hookup. The enclo- sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit- tings are required. SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-1 10-1-02 REV.3 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) , NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BI ORDERED SEPARATE OR SEE PAGE 3-4 RELEASE MECHANIS REGULATOR SHIPPING WT 25 LB. (11 kg) FIGURE 2 000138 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly (Part No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except it ' also contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid by opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired. Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto- matic equipment and gas shut-off accessories, as well as initiating audible and visual alarms. ' The tank (ordered separately) is mounted within the enclosure. ' The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal con- ditions, requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The detection and additional equipment required per system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 K!, 5 SHIPPING WT. 34 LB. (15 kg) SWITCH SOLENOID FIGURE 3 000179 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used in double and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly its expellent gas line will be connected to. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup (agent', tank must be ordered separately), and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping. This assembly is used ► The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part Na. 429862) in a minimum amount of space. ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK M BE ORDERED SEPARATELY ► OR SEE PAGE 3 MOUNTING ENCLOSURE ► SHIPPING WT 13 LB. (6 kg) FIGURE 4 000,42 ► RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878) is used in double and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator assembly that its expellant gas line will be connected to. ► The tank bracket is constructed of mild steel and painted red. It is designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of space. The Bracket Assembly can only be utilized with 3.0 gallon tanks ► (Part No. 429862). BRACKET ASSEMBLY SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 kg) MOUNTING BRACKET In multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The regulator contains two outlets 135° apart. One outlet is used to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an additional enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent tank connected (two tanks maximum) at 110 psi (759 kPa). The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant gas cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated release assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a knockout to facilitate distribution piping hookup. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY ► OR SEE PAGE 3.4 N. AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATOR NG WT. .(9 kg) FIGURE 6 000143 The agent tank shipping assembly (3 -Gallon, Part No. 429862, ► and 1.5 Gallon, Part No. 429864) consists of a stainless steel tank and an adaptor/tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assembly con- tains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture is stamped on the tank nameplate. The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. It TANK ADAPTOR/ TUBE ASSEMBLY ► 3 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 kg) 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. ► 5 LB. (2 kg) AGENT TANK FIGURE 5 FIGURE 7 000140 It s - OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM IN -CABINET USE ONLY) The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 79493, contains the same regulated release mechanism as the standard ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly. The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part, No. 418054, is identical to the mechanical version except it con- tains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. ► These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in a suitable equipment enclosure either horizontally or vertically. They contain all the necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully install the assembly. The agent tank is installed separately and ► need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled. NOTE: OEM Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high enough in cabi- net so that there is sufficient room to install and remove cartridge. RELEASE MECHANW REGULAT MOUNTING BRACKET SHIPPING WT. 10 LB. (5 kg) FIGURE 8 0001" OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly, Part No. 418691, includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose and OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for the bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522. SHIPPING WT.4 LB. (2 kg) FIGURE 9 002225 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-3 10-1-02 REV.6 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly, Part No. 429872, consists of two expellant gas hoses, two grommets, and the mounting enclo- sure. The assembly is used in 9 gallon systems. It can be coupled with a 3 -gallon regulated release assembly or a 3 -gallon regulated actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gallons of agent. Agent tanks must be ordered separately. The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount of space. NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY SHIPPING WT. 26 LBS. (12 kg) FIGURE 10 002277 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) The 24 VDC Regulated Release Assembly, Part No. 429859, is used where electric, thermostat detection is required via the use of a releasing control unit. This assembly consists of a 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN II -C regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip- ment. Agent tank must be ordered separately. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when the control panel receives a signal from the detection circuit. The panel then sends an electrical signal to the 24 VDC regulated release, causing it to actuate. When actuation occurs, the gas cartridge is punctured, pressurizing the agent tank and discharging the agent through the distribution piping. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY SHIPPING WT. 34 LB. (15 kg) FIGURE 11 002279 r SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-4 REV. 5 10-1-02 ►ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES GAS CARTRIDGES Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing The R-102 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or carbon both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank. When dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system is actuat- ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the following part ed, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and the released numbers: gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks through the dis- Shipping Wt. charge piping and out the discharge nozzles. Part No. Description lb. (kg) Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car - 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15) tridges are available as shown in Figure 12. Shipping Assembly including: ' Cartridges noted as TC/DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) and 429853 Mechanical Regulated I Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges noted Release Assembly ► as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly Cartridge selection options are provided in Section IV under Tank 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14) and Cartridge Requirements. Shipping Assembly including: NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 GallonTahk'AssernbI y 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator 36 (16) (20 7 718 T 1 11 318 IN. Shipping Assembly including: ; (28.9 cm) 10 1121 (27 cm) 14 518 IN. 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly (37.1 cm) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 2 1/2 IN. 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure8 (6.4 cm) 18 ( ) 2 1/2 IN. 4 3/16 IN. Shipping Assembly including: (6.4 cm) (10.6 cm) 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box 1N. 9/16 Assembly 3 3 116 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly LT -20-R LT -30-R DOUBLE -TANK LT -A-101-30 CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9) PART NO. 423429 PART NO. 423435 PART NO. 423493 PART NO. 423491 (TC/DOT) (TCJDOT TCiDOT Shipping Assembly including: 000145 000146 ) ( 000147 000148 (T000148 ) 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18) Shipping Assembly including: 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box 9 IN. 7 7/8IN. Assembly (22.9 cm) (20 cm) 11 5/8 IN. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) - (29.5 cm) 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9) Assembly including:I (5.1 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket 2 Assembly (5.1 cm) (6..44 cm)) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 2112 IN. (6.4 cm) 101.10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101-30 CARTRIDGE ' PART NO. 423439 (TCIOOT) PART NO. 423441 PART NO. 423443 ► PART NO. 15850 (DOT) (TC/DOT) (TCIDOT) 000149 000150 000151 FIGURE 12 NOZZLES There are twelve types of discharge nozzles each designed to dis- tribute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the hazard area: ► 1. 1W Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle 2. 1 N Nozzle 8. 260 Nozzle 3. 1/2N Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle 4. 3N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle 5. 2W Nozzle 11. 1F Nozzle ► 6. 230 Nozzle 12. 1100 Nozzle Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for a specific application and must only be used in those areas. See Nozzle Application Chart in Section IV — System Design, for individual nozzle usage. 3/8 - 18 NPT FEMALETHREAD INTERNAL CUP STRAINER INSIDE RECESS FOR -► BLOW OFF CAPLOOP XXXX-X VENDOR CODE NOZZLE (IF PRESENT) STAMPING FIGURE 13 000002 Nozzle Identification Chart SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-5 10-1-02 REV.4 SWIVEL ADAPTOR The Swivel Adaptor Assembly, Part No. 418569, consists of a Swiv- el nut, swivel body and swivel ball. All are chrome -plated. The swiv- el adaptor allows any nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all directions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel Adaptors. 30 DEGREE ROTATION RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAPS 3/8 - 18 NPT FEMALE THREAD PT READ FIGURE 14 000003 The Rubber Blow -Off Cap, Part No. 77676, help keep the orifice of the nozzle free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. Rubber Blow -Off Caps must be ordered as a Shipping Assembly, Part No. 77695, which contains 50 blow -off caps, or Part No. 77411, which contains 12 blow -off caps. FIGURE 15 000009 METAL BLOW -OFF CAP Two types of metal blow -off caps are available as options to the standard rubber caps. The metal cap can be used in unusually high heat conditions, generally over 400 °F (204 °C). The metal blow -off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during dis- charge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745 contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on standard, non -swivel nozzles and Shipping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on swivel nozzles. NOTICE If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broil- er or salamander protection, use (2) two IN noz- zles (Part No. 56930) instead of 1/2N nozzles. oo STAINLESS STEEL WIRE zcr METAL CAP FIGURE 16 000152 Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle' Flow Iypg Part No. Stamiping No.. Nozzle Identification 1 W Nozzle 419336 1W 1 Chrome -Plated Body IN Nozzle 419335 IN 1 Chrome -Plated Body 1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 1/2 Chrome -Plated Body Metal blow -off caps are not allowed with the 1/2N nozzle 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 3 Chrome -Plated Body 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2 Chrome -Plated Body 230 Nozzle 419339 230 2 Chrome -Plated Body 245 Nozzle 419340 245 2 Chrome -Plated Body 260 Nozzle 419341 260 2 Chrome -Plated Body 290 Nozzle 419342 290 2 Chrome -Plated Body 2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 2 Chrome -Plated Body IF Nozzle 419333 IF 1 Chrome -Plated Body 1100 Nozzle 430912 1100 1 Chrome -Plated Body ►' Nozzle stamping may contain an additional letter indicating a vendor's code. SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-5 10-1-02 REV.4 SWIVEL ADAPTOR The Swivel Adaptor Assembly, Part No. 418569, consists of a Swiv- el nut, swivel body and swivel ball. All are chrome -plated. The swiv- el adaptor allows any nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all directions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel Adaptors. 30 DEGREE ROTATION RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAPS 3/8 - 18 NPT FEMALE THREAD PT READ FIGURE 14 000003 The Rubber Blow -Off Cap, Part No. 77676, help keep the orifice of the nozzle free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. Rubber Blow -Off Caps must be ordered as a Shipping Assembly, Part No. 77695, which contains 50 blow -off caps, or Part No. 77411, which contains 12 blow -off caps. FIGURE 15 000009 METAL BLOW -OFF CAP Two types of metal blow -off caps are available as options to the standard rubber caps. The metal cap can be used in unusually high heat conditions, generally over 400 °F (204 °C). The metal blow -off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during dis- charge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745 contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on standard, non -swivel nozzles and Shipping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on swivel nozzles. NOTICE If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broil- er or salamander protection, use (2) two IN noz- zles (Part No. 56930) instead of 1/2N nozzles. oo STAINLESS STEEL WIRE zcr METAL CAP FIGURE 16 000152 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 79825, is used to change direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve, and remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assembly can only be used in the area where the conduit attaches to the regulated release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly, the maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed. The Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly, Part No. 79825, consists of 6 conduit offsets. CONDUIT CONNECTi CONDUIT COUPLING CONDUIT OFFSET .,..:,b .. t, �, . FIGURE 17 000159 "QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR The "Quik -Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid -tight seal around both distribution piping and detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Quik -Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or conduit. The adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78195), 3/8 in. (Part No. 77284), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77286), or 3/4 in. (Part No. 77288) pipe or conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a conduit connector must be installed in each end of the adaptor. The "Quik -Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. 77285 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. 77287 24 1 1/8 in. 3/4 in. 77289 24 1 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube - ADAPTOR BODY 24 1 1/8 in. GASKET 79147 24 1 1/8 in. LOCKWASHER 79.1531 t 24, NUT r "COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid -tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distribu- tion piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Compression -Seal" adaptor is a straight -through design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79148), 3/8 in. (Part No. 79150), 1/2 in. (Part No. 79146), and EMT conduit size of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79152). Each "Compression -Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: COMPRESSION NUT ADAPTOR BODY GASKET LOCKWASHER NUT-ci;;�P FIGURE -19 000155 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq- uid -tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT Conduit when installing the detec- tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi- tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in the detector bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul- tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the detection line. "Hood Seal" Adaptors are available in quantities of 6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253. SEAL NUT SEAL j WASHER ADAPTOR BODY --► GASKET PULLEY O ELBOW (NOT ART OF ASSEMBLY) USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO. 423250 FIGURE 20 FIGURE 18 000156 000154 Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. Pipe / 1/2 in. tube 79149 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. Pipe 79147 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. EMT.Conduit. .- 79.1531 t 24, 1 1/8 in COMPRESSION NUT ADAPTOR BODY GASKET LOCKWASHER NUT-ci;;�P FIGURE -19 000155 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq- uid -tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT Conduit when installing the detec- tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi- tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in the detector bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul- tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the detection line. "Hood Seal" Adaptors are available in quantities of 6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253. SEAL NUT SEAL j WASHER ADAPTOR BODY --► GASKET PULLEY O ELBOW (NOT ART OF ASSEMBLY) USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO. 423250 FIGURE 20 FIGURE 18 000156 000154 -a DETECTORS The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, link- age, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must be ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly to the mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the fusible link. The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the regulated release mechanism. There are three styles of detectors available: the clip -on style, the hinged style, and the scissor style. The clip -on style allows the wire rope to be strung completely through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. The hinged style detector requires the wire rope to be strung to the detector bracket, and then "threaded" through the linkage assem- bly before continuing to the next detector bracket. The scissor style allows the wire rope to be strung completely through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. Each style of detector consists of two types of assemblies: The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) includes a test link and is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is sometimes referred to as the end -of -line detector and is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope "ter- minates," or is anchored at the detector bracket. Only one terminal detector is required per detection system. The Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any detector located in-line between the regulated release assembly and the terminal detector. When using Part No. 56837 and 56838 style detectors, a total of 12 detectors can be in one detection system: 11 series detectors, Part No. 56837 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 56838. When using Part No. 15373 and 15375 style detectors, a total of 5 detectors can be in one detection system: 4 series detectors, Part No. 15373 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 15375. When using Part No. 417368 and 417369 style detectors, a total of 15 detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series detec- tors, Part No. 417369 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 417368. SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-7 10-1-02 REV 4 CLIP -ON STYLE — PART NO. 56837 AND 56838 HINGED STYLE — PART NO. 15373 AND 15375 LINKAGE �I I FUSIBLE I I BRAC LINKKET SCISSOR STYLE — PART NO. 417368 AND 417369 PULLEY ELBOWS 000158 BRACKET r 000159 FIGURE 21 There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction of the wire rope by 90°. Ansul recommends for temperatures not in excess of 700 °F (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has compres- sion ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671 (socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (compression end type). PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 423250 O00 000160 000161 FIGURE 22 LINKAGEFUSIBLE LINK BRACKET aaols> HINGED STYLE — PART NO. 15373 AND 15375 LINKAGE �I I FUSIBLE I I BRAC LINKKET SCISSOR STYLE — PART NO. 417368 AND 417369 PULLEY ELBOWS 000158 BRACKET r 000159 FIGURE 21 There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction of the wire rope by 90°. Ansul recommends for temperatures not in excess of 700 °F (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has compres- sion ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671 (socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (compression end type). PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 423250 O00 000160 000161 FIGURE 22 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-8 REV. 5 10-1-02 PULLEYTEE The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to change the direction of two wire ropes by 90°. It must be used in areas where the tem- peratures are within the range of 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C). Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actuation lines and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees cannot be used within a detection line. FIGURE 23 000441 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detector, through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows, and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote manual pull stations. The cable is available in 50 ft. (15 m) (Part No. 15821) and 500 ft. (152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835 or Part No. 54011) is required for manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The remote manual pull station should be mounted at a point of egress and positioned at a height determined by the authority hav- ing jurisdiction. Trim rings, Part No. 427074 (pack of 10), are avail- able. PART NO. 4835 (WITHOUT CABLE) PART NO. 54011 (WITH 50 FT. OF CABLE) METAL STAMPED 000163 FIGURE 24 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem- bly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 1 1/2 in., and 2 in. Ansul style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 in. Asco style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed. Maximum Part Operating No, Descriotion Pressure 55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (69 kPa) 25937 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5,kPa) ANSUL STYLE 000164 ASCO STYLE 000165 FIGURE 25 r ► ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of either natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulat- ed release assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., and 3 in. The valve is held open by an ener- gized solenoid and upon system actuation, the switch contacts in the regulated release assembly open, thus de -energizing the Cir_' cuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve to close. Valves are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed. 0 8 MANUAL RESET RELAY FIGURE 26 000168 The manual reset relay, Part No. 14702 or Part No. 426151, is required when using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or power failure, the valve cannot be re -opened, allowing gas to flow, until the reset relay button is manually pressed, re -energizing the circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay is also recommended for electrical shut down. FIGURE 27 000087 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-9 10-1-02 REV 2 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878, Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No. 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Each switch has a set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware and 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit. COM ALARM INITIATING SWITCH .C. N.O. FIGURE 28 =612 The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, can be field ► mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must ► be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. SPACER TOWARD / WHEN SPACER AND AUTOMAN i// SWITCH ARE PROPERLY MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE \_ N.O. AND N.C. TERMINALS ALARM INITIATING SWITCH COM / N.O. \ N.C. FIGURE 29 Ocs890 Maximum Part Operating Description Pressure 13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (172 kPa) 13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (172 kPa) 13709 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve 25 psi (172 kPa) (ASCO) 13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (172 kPa) 17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 0 8 MANUAL RESET RELAY FIGURE 26 000168 The manual reset relay, Part No. 14702 or Part No. 426151, is required when using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or power failure, the valve cannot be re -opened, allowing gas to flow, until the reset relay button is manually pressed, re -energizing the circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual reset relay is also recommended for electrical shut down. FIGURE 27 000087 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-9 10-1-02 REV 2 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878, Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No. 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Each switch has a set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware and 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit. COM ALARM INITIATING SWITCH .C. N.O. FIGURE 28 =612 The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, can be field ► mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must ► be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. SPACER TOWARD / WHEN SPACER AND AUTOMAN i// SWITCH ARE PROPERLY MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE \_ N.O. AND N.C. TERMINALS ALARM INITIATING SWITCH COM / N.O. \ N.C. FIGURE 29 Ocs890 SECTION III – SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-10 REV. 1 10-1-02 REGULATOR TEST KIT The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required to test the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12 -year maintenance examinations. This will ensure that the regulator is functioning properly. FIGURE 30 000169 FUSIBLE LINK Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below: O M1311� Fusible Link t� To Be Used Fusible Shipping 32335 Where Link Assembly Temperature Temperature Part No. Prat No. Rating Does Not Exceed 415739(l) 415739(l) . 165 °F (74 °C) 100-F (38-C) 415740(l) 415740(l) 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C) 415741 (1) 415744 (25) 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) 415742(l) 415745 (25) 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C) 415743(l) 415746 (25) 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C) 56816(l) 73867 (25) 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C) O M1311� O t� Length G4M<. TEMPERATURE 32335 RATING STAMPED ON 32336 FUSIBLE LINK BODY O i K STYLE ML STYLE 000170 500 °F (260 °C) ONLY 000171 31810 FIGURE 31 MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER The Maximum Registering Thermometer, Part No. 15240, is used to indicate the highest normal temperature for the protected area. Once this is established, the correct rated fusible link can be chosen. -- •— BURSTING DISC The R-102 Bursting Disc is installed in the tank adaptor assembly. The bursting disc eliminates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme temperature variations. The bursting discs are available in packs of 10, Part No. 417911. (5 - FIGURE 32 000172 NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE The Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 551265, is required to prop- erly aim each nozzle tothe correct aiming point. The device clamps to the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on the surface that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold that angle. The aiming device requires an adaptor, Part No. 431186, to attach it to the nozzle. The adaptor must be ordered separately. 0\ ADAPTOR(OROER SEPARATELY 0 NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE FIGURE 33 006520 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATION HOSE The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actua- ► tion line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator and ► can also be connected end to end. The hose has the same thread, 7/16-20, as the fittings. The actuation hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMAN and each regulated actuator. P. Hose Part No. Length 31809 16 in. (41 cm) 32335 20 in. (51 cm) 32336 24 in. (61 cm) 430815 42 in. (107 cm) Fitting Part No. Description 31810 Male Elbow (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 31811 Male Tee (7/16-20 x 7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) ► 32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) .1204 MEIN,, MI. 7116-20 7116-201 FIGURE 34 0004M 9-1 SYSTEM DESIGN The Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli- ances and hood and duct configurations. The design information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the design of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. The R-102 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents and components, therefore, they may be used together for cooking appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary ANSUL AUTOMAN Release can be either an R-102 or a PIRANHA ANSUL AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional R-102 or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a 101 remote release, any combination of the maximum number of regulated actuators can be used. • Both systems must actuate simultaneously. • Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri- ate manual. • Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected with the same type of system, either R-102 or PIRANHA, unless the center -to -center spacing between the adjacent R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 inches. • When appliances are protected with R-102 nozzles, the hood and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be pro- tected with PIRANHA nozzles. • Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed. One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct system design. This section is divided into ten sub -sections: Noz- zle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, Actu- ation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual Pull Sta- tion Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Requirements, Electri- cal Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch Requirements, and Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of these sections must be completed before attempting any installation. System design sketches should be made of all aspects of design for reference during installation. NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and quantity for duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection. This section must be completed before determining tank quantity and piping requirements. Duct Protection — Single Nozzle All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to the horizontal and ducts with directional bends. The R-102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the . size of duct being protected. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-1 10-1-02 REVS GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Nozzles must be located 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 1. 2-8 IN. (5 — 20 cm) FIGURE 1 000173 2. In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8 in. (20 cm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper assem- bly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding the maxi- mum of 8 in. (20 cm) in this way will not void the UL listing of the system. 3. Previously listed 3 flow number and 5 flow number duct pro- tection detailed in earlier published manual, Part No. 418087- 06, can also still by utilized. DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (127 cm) PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (41 cm) DIAMETER • One 1100 nozzle (Part No. 430912) = one flow number • 50 in. (127 cm) perimeter maximum • 16 in. (41 cm) diameter maximum DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN. (254 cm) PERIMETER/ 32 IN. (81.3 cm) DIAMETER • One 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = two flow numbers • 100 in. (254 cm) perimeter maximum • 32 in. (81.3 cm) diameter maximum • A 2WH nozzle (Part No. 78078) must be substituted for a 2W nozzle for any installation using Option 2 of the 1.5 gallon sys- tem coverage (duct and plenum protection only). A 2WH nozzle is limited to a maximum of 75 in. (190 cm) perimeter or a maxi- mum diameter of 24 in. (61 cm) of coverage. The chart below shows the maximum protection available from each duct nozzle. Part 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon Description No. System System 2W Nozzle 419337 Maximum Maximum 100 in. (254 cm) 100 in. (254 cm) Perimeter Perimeter 1100 Nozzle 430912 Maximum Maximum 50 in. (127 cm) 50 in. (127 cm) Perimeter Perimeter P_ SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 ► Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER - 3 FLOW OPTION • One 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430912) and one 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = three flow numbers • 135 in. (343 cm) perimeter maximum • No round duct option available • Follow design table in Figure 2 to determine maximum module size for each nozzle �---Side B 1 Side A 1� Li122J 2W FIGURE 2 00652, Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an "A" dimen- sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B" dimension of 55 in. (140 cm) long. Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the "A" dimension is 8.0 in. (20 cm), the "B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. (149 cm). In this example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three flow application. Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1100 Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the 'B" module length for the 1100 nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1100 nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with- in the remaining module. 1100 Module 2W Module Side A Side B Side B Side B Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 4 (10) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58). 37.0 (94) 5 (13) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 6 (15) 59.5 (151) 22.5 (57) 37.0 (94) 7 (18) 59.0 (150) 22.0 (56) 37.0 (94) 8 (20) 58.5 (149) 22.0 (56) 36.5 (93) 9 (23) 58.0 (147) 21.5 (55) 36.5 (93) 10 (25) 57.0 (145) 21.0 (53) 36.0 (91) 11 (28) 56.0 (142) 20.5 (52) 35.5 (90) 12 (31) 55.5 (141) 20.0 (51) 35.5 (90) 13 (33) 54.5 (138) 19.5 (50) 35.0 (89) 14 (36) 53.5 (136) 18.5 (47) 35.0 (89) 15 (38) 52.0 (132) 18.0 (46) 34.0 (86) 16 (41) 51.0 (130) 17.0 (43) 34.0 (86) 17 (43) 49.5 (126) 16.0 (41) 33.5 (85) 18 (46) 47.5 (121) 14.5 (37) 33.0 (84) 19 (48) 46.0 (117) 13.5 (34) 32.5 (83) 20 (51) 43.5 (111) 12.0 (31) 31.7 (81) 21 (53) 41.0 (104) 10.0 (25) 31.0 (79) 22 (56) 38.0 (97) 7.5 (19) 30.5 (78) 23 (58) 33.5 (85) 4.0 (10) 29.5 (75) �---Side B 1 Side A 1� Li122J 2W FIGURE 2 00652, Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an "A" dimen- sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B" dimension of 55 in. (140 cm) long. Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the "A" dimension is 8.0 in. (20 cm), the "B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. (149 cm). In this example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three flow application. Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1100 Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the 'B" module length for the 1100 nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1100 nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with- in the remaining module. Duct Protection — Multiple Nozzle (Continued) DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER • Ducts over 135 in. perimeter must be modularized using 2W nozzles (Part No. 419337) • No round duct option available • Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size for each 2W nozzle • When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as Side "A" and then recheck it using the longest side as Side "A". This comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity of nozzles one way versus the other way. When working with Chart 1, the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally divided within the duct area. CHART NO. 1 e � A SIDE "B" SIDE "A" SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747• Page 4-3 10-1-02 REV.4 When working with Chart 2, one half of the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally positioned in the top half of the area of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be posi- tioned in the bottom half of the duct area. Example: The duct to be protected has a Side "A" of 40 in. and a Side "B" of 60 in. Referring to the design chart, this duct requires 4 nozzles. One half of 4 = 2. Therefore, 2 nozzles must be equally positioned in each of the two duct areas. See Figure 3. SIDE "B" 30 IN. (76 mm) 30 IN. (76 mm) 20 IN. (51 mm) SIDE "A" --------- 20 IN. (51 mm) 60 IN. (152 mm) M®mlmmMEMM©©MMEOmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmo mmom 19 o■■■■■■■■■■■rte■■■■■■■■■■�: I1011lll�lllll�llllll�I� Illll�lllll�l�llll�llllll�I■.11lll�©��..i�l�o���o�� CHART NO. 2 B A --e NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES LISTED IN CHART 2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES. 1 40 IN. (102 mm) FIGURE 3 006523 006522 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 Transition Protection Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the perimeter or the diameter equals, or is less than, the size of the duct being protected. The nozzle must be located in the center of the transition opening where the maximum perimeter or diameter begins. See Figure 4. FIGURE 4 000174 Electrostatic Precipitator Protection Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipita- tor installed at or near the base. These precipitators are used to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air. Normally electrostatic precipitators do not require protection but should the "authority having jurisdiction" require protection, use the following guidelines. Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro- tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N noz- zle(s) (Part No. 419334) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is stamped with 1/2N, indicating that it is a 1/2 -flow nozzle and must be count- ed as 1/2 flow number. When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct noz- zles) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to dis- charge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protection guide- lines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition, the transition guidelines must be followed. The 1/2N nozzle (Part No. 419334) must be centered 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) below the precipitator and aimed to discharge at the center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is physically impossi- ble to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) due to pre- cipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in. ' (25 cm). See Figure 5. DUCT \ II I IISEE DUCT PROTECT ON R NOZZLE PRECIPITATOR 111\ /11 10-26 IN.' (25-66 cm) NOZZLE FOR PRECIPITATOR PROTECTION IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (25 TO 66 cm), NOZZLE MAY BE MOUNT- ED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm). ' FIGURE 5 000196 r Plenum Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) or the ► 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430192) or the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for plenum protection. The 1 W nozzle tip is stamped with 1 W and ► the 1 N nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating they are one -flow nozzles and must be counted as one flow number each. When pro- tecting a plenum chamber, the entire chamber must be protected ► regardless of filter length. ► VERTICAL PROTECTION — GENERAL ► One 1 W nozzle or 1100 nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last nozzle must be no more than 2 ft. (.6 m). After the first nozzle, any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4 ft. (1.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The . plenum width must not exceed 4 ft. (1.2 m). (The 1W or 1100 noz- zle can be used on single or V -bank filter arrangements.) See ► Figure 6. 7 FT!R -\ FIGURE 6 000197 ► When protecting plenums with the 1W or 1100 nozzle, two options of coverage are available: ► Option 1: The 1100 or 1 W nozzle must be on the center line of the single or "V" bank filter and positioned within 1-20 in. (2.5-51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See ► Figure 7. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-5 10-1-02 REV.3 20 IN. (51 cm) MAXIMUM 1 IN. (2.5 cm) MINIMUM t 20 IN. (51 cm) MAXIMUM ;m) ' FIGURE 7 000199 ' Option 2: The 1 W or 1100 nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 8-12 in. (20-30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled to the center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be within 2 in. (5 cm) from the perpendicular center line of the fil- ter. See Figure 8. NOZZLE TIP MUST BE W THIS AREA ► :m) 20 cm) 4UM FIGURE 8 000200 ► HORIZONTAL PROTECTION — OPTION 1 1 N NOZZLE — PART NO. 419335 — SINGLE BANK PROTECTION One 1 N nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) of single filter bank plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. See Figure 9. Y" 2_. (5 — 000201 rwurtv— ZF SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 Plenum Protection (Continued) ► HORIZONTAL PROTECTION — OPTION 2 For a plenum, either single or W" bank, with a linear extension 1100 NOZZLE — PART NO. 430912 — W" BANK PROTECTION longer than 10 feet (3.1 m), each bank may be protected using one 1W NOZZLE — PART NO. 419336 1 N nozzle every 10 ft. (3.1 m) or less depending on the overall length of the plenum. See Figure 12. The nozzles may point in the One 1100 or 1 W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of W" bank opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is protected, plenum. The nozzle must be mounted horizontally, positioned 1/3 the and the 10 ft. (3.1 m) limitation is not exceeded. See Figure 13. The filter height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be located at nozzle positioning shown in Figure 14 is not an acceptable method 6 ft. (1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. See Figure 10. of protection because the plenum area directly under the tee is not , 1100 NOZZLE OR 1W NOZZLE within the discharge pattern of either nozzle. 1/3 (H) HEIGHT OF FILTER (H) 6 FT. (1.81 1 MAXIMUM ~(1.2 m)�'' MAXIMUM FIGURE 10 006524 1 N NOZZLE — PART NO. 419335 — W" BANK PROTECTION Two IN nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) by 4 ft. (1.2 m) wide of "W bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the l 2 4 in. 5 to 10 cm from the face of the filtertd 10 FT. U m) plenum, to () , cenereMAXIMUM between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. See Figure 11. 2 FIGURE 11 10 FT (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 30 FT. (9.1 m) FIGURE 12 000206 FIGURE 13 000207 FIGURE 14 000206 r SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-7 10-1-02 REV.3 Appliance Protection The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct noz- zle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct aim- ing point. Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection 1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two types. A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. 2. Using Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection," determine which nozzle is needed to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions listed. A. If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the maxi- mum dimensions listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. 3. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceed— ed, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to the mul- tiple nozzle requirements. Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot without the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length (46 cm x 46 cm) and the inside of the overall area including the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length (46 cm x 61 cm). From the Table `Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection,' either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect the fryer, depending on the maximum nozzle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-8 REV. 5 10-1-02 Fryer—Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection Nozzle Max. Size Location Max. Size Overall Type of Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230 ' 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 53 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245 ► 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 38 cm) I 1 I I II I i I i I ii i TOP OF FRYER I I Nozzle Height Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure (69 cm to 119 cm) 15 and 16 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure (51 cm to 69 cm) 15 and 16 I I U i I I I I I u I I I I I u r I I I TOP OF FRYER I FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SPLIT VAT SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. FIGURE 15 002280 FIGURE 16 002283 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-9 10-1-02 REV.6 Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Continued) Max. Size Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location ► 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 290 13 in. to .16 in. See Figure 17 (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) (33 to 41 cm) ► 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 3N See Figure See Figure 18 (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) 34 ► 18 in. x 18 in. 18 in. x 27 5/8 in. 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 19 (46 cm x 46 cm) (46 cm x 70 cm) (64 cm to 89 cm) _y i ti i i i j I I I I I I 1 TOP OF FRYER I I I FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA ± 3 IN. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND ± 1 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA. FIGURE 17 002286 ► 34 IN. (66 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER OF HAZARD AREA 21 in. (53 cm) I MINIMUM VERTICAL I NOZZLE I I HEIGHT i i `rte\ i L � FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOK- ING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. ► FIGURE 18 002287 RIGHT--TO-LEFT ac00i0 CENTERLINE FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD NOTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER. FIGURE 19 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-10 REV. 5 10-1-02 Fryer— Multiple Nozzle Protection Design Requirements: Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle can be divided into modules. Each module must not exceed the maximum area allowed for a single nozzle. However, when utilizing multiple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with dripboard can be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a dripboard or not. The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm) or in terms of ft., 6 sq. ft. (1.8 m). 1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken down into two types: A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the inter- nal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and length to obtain the arga)oi the,frypptt in square, !Aches.) a } B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of the overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and length dimensions. -2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which can be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified in Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Protection.' A. If the module considered does not include any portion of the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and max- imum dimension listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. If the module considered includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot area and dimension listed in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall area and dimensions listed in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. 3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be rede- fined with the possibility of an additional nozzle. Options For Modularizing Fryers ► The following Figure 20 shows approved methods of dividing (mod- ularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly protected. EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIPBOARD, MUST NOT EXCEED 497 SO. IN. (3207 sq. cm) MIDPOINT ' MIDPOINT DRIP BOARD DRIP BOARD 000219 EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD b. DRIP BOARD Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat without the drip - board measures 18 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (46 cm. x 76 cm) and the inside of the overall vat including the dripboard measures 24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (61 cm x 76 cm). Because the fryer is 30 in. (76 cm) in length, it exceeds the coverage of a single nozzle. Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall vat dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (61 x 38 cm). From the Table, `Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection," either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect each fryer module, depending on the maximum noz- zle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements ► allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures, 15 through 19. See additional examples in Appendix Section. EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE 7 CANNOT EXCEED 324 SO. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) AREA OF THIS MODULE (FRY POT PLUS DRIP BOARD) CANNOT EXCEED 497 SO. IN. 000215 AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE CANNOT EXCEED 324 SO. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD 002298 FIGURE 20 VA SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747' . Page 4-11 10-1-02 REV.6 Fryer — Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued) I %� AIM POINT I I I! I AIM POINT (DIAGONAL I Maximum Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection I CENTER OF MODULE I I I I r I MODULE Max. Size Module I , i j COOKING I i t 1 I I Max. Size Module Overall Type of Nozzle Height Frypot Only __ With Dripboard`_ Nozzle Above Top of Fryer ► 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in, x 294 in.2 230 27 in. to 47 in. (53 cm x.14 m2) (53 cm x.19 m2) (69 cm to 119 cm) ► 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 245 20 in. to 27 in. (53 cm x.14 m2) (53 cm x.19 m2) (51 to 69 cm) ' 25 3/8 x 370.5 int 25 3/8 x 495 int 290 13 in. to 16 in. (65 cm x.24 m2) (65 cm x.32 m2) (33 to 41 cm) ' 25 3/8 x 370.5 int 25 3/8-x 495 int 3N See Figure 23 (65 cm x.24 m2) (65 cm -x 0.32 m2) ' 27 5/8 x 324 in.2 27 5/8 x 497 int 3N 25 in. to 35 in. (70 cm x .21 m2) (70 cm x.32 m2) (64 cm to 89 cm) . These limitations also apply to tilt skillet/braising pans. I I �T� I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I Nozzle Location See Figure 21 See Figure 21 See Figure 22 See Figure 23 See Figure 24 34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER HAZARD AREA 21 in. (532 MINIMUM ( VERTICAL �'I NOZZLE Y� HEIGHT FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERI - 000218 000213 METER OF THE MODULAR IT IS PROTECTING AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE MOD- RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA. ULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA. ► FIGURE 23 ► 002291 FIGURE 21 ` \ I %� AIM POINT I I I! I AIM POINT (DIAGONAL I (DIAGONAL I I j CENTER OF I CENTER OF MODULE I I I I r I MODULE j I i 1 COOKING AREA) j I , i j COOKING I i t 1 I I AREA) I i I I i I I I A I I I I I RIGHT-TO-LEFTI I i I I I RIGHT -TO - I j CENTERLINE I I I LEFT CENTER- LINE i FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERI - ULE AND D z 1 IN. AREA 3 IN. (2.5cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE MOD- METER AND FORWARD OF THE RIGHT-TO-LEFT CENTERLINE OF THE COOKING AREA. MODULE AND AIMEEDD AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE. N. cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST�SIDE OF THE THE AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONAL CENTER OF THE ► MODULAR COOKING AREA. FIGURE 22 FIGURE 24 ► 002290 002293 r SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-12 REV. 5 10-1-02 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection —Tilt Skillet / Braising Pan Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer to )-Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4-10, for maximum fryer nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations. Although the maximum 6 sq. ft. total surface cooking area require- ment applies to fryer protection, it does not apply to tilt skillets or braising pans. Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed the fryer limitations for "MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL WITH DRIPBOARD" coverage per nozzle as described in Table on Page 4-11. Tilt Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover. Fryer protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the appli- ance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising pan ► cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge: See Figure 25 THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE NOZZLE DISCHARGE. FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK CENTERLINE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN. FIGURE 25 COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH EDGE i OF DISCHARGE PATTERN � i / I FOR MINIMUM I AND MAXIMUM i I NOZZLE HEIGHTS, REFER TO FRYER i I NOZZLE PARAMETERS � � � I I I ooam� FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK CENTERLINE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN. FIGURE 25 Range Protection 1 -Flow Nozzle ► The R-102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection of ranges. One of the design options requires a one -flow nozzle and three of the design options require two -flow nozzles. NOTICE A 13 in. (33 cm) diameter wok pan is the largest wok size that can be protected on ranges. ► When protecting hot top ranges, the entire ► cooking surface must be protected. Range Protection (1 -Flow Nozzle) ► Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a IN ► nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with IN, indi- cating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum length ► of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) per nozzle. When protecting a range, the IN nozzle must be located a maxi- mum of 10 in. (25.4 cm) from each burner grate centerline and must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 26. 401N. (102 cm) 1 10 IN. (25 cm) MAXIMUM 1N NOZZLE 10 IN. (25 cm) MAXIMUM 32 IN. (81 cm) MAXIMUM AIMING POINT FIGURE 26 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-13 10-1-02 REV.4 When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf located above the range top, two protection options are available: One requires a IF nozzle, Part No. 419333, and the other option requires a 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. Option 1: 1 F Nozzle: When using the 1 F nozzle for range protec- tion with back shelf, the maximum length of the burner grates being protected must not exceed 28 in. (71 cm). and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 336 sq. in. (2168 sq. cm). See Figure 27 for noz- zle location details. 1 F NOZZLE 12 IN. (30 5 cm) SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) AIM 201N. 40-48 IN. I POINT MINIM (102 - 122 cm) I MINIMUM I 14 IN. (35.6 cm) 141N. MAXIMUM `FRONT TO REAR (35.6 cm) MAXIMUM MAXIMUM CENTERLINE 1F NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 27 000233 Option 2: 260 Nozzle: When using the 260 nozzle for range pro- tection with back shelf, the maximum length of burner grates being protected must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm). Nozzle must be locat- ed on the front edge of the burner grates and aimed at a point 10 in. (25 cm) from the back edge of the burn- er grates. Nozzle must be mounted 30 to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. See Figure 28. 4d1IM0Y*4Ry 30. (76 SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) DM GRATES FIGURE 28 0002 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-14 REV. 5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle High Proximity Application (2 -Flow Nozzle): 40 in. to 50 in. (102 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER O One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 sq. In. COOKING SURFACE (4335 sq. cm) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. (71 cm). OR 11 3/8 IN. (29 cm) When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZ. be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures TO CENTER OF ANY ' 29 and 30. BURNER GRATE 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION IC E NTERLiNE O)= COOKING SURFACE i I ) j r. ) - I 245 NOZZLE TIP (127 cm) LOCATION CENTER O 1 MAXIMUM COOKING SURFACE ( HEIGHT OR OF 245 11 3/8 IN. (29 cm) I 1 I NOZZLE MAXIMUM FROM T CENTERLINE OF NOZ ( TO CENTER OF ANY 40 IN. ► BURNER GRATE (102 cm) I MINIMUM 1J HEIGHT ' OF 245 ' I NOZZLE ' I TIP I 000238 1-0-0 O O ' FIGURE 29 NOTICE ' Four burner grates shown in Figure 30. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) maximum from nozzle centerline to center of ' any burner grate. JNG � I it % .• � �! JNG FIGURE 30 r-• Range Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle Medium Proximity Application (2 -Flow Nozzle): 30 in. to 40 in. (76 cm to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. ► One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 sq. in. ► (4955 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (81 cm). When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures ' 31 and 32. ' 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE ► I 1 40 IN. �- (102 cm) ► 1 MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 260 I i NOZZLE - I TIP I i 30 IN. ► (76 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT ► OF 260 ► ' I NOZZLE I I TIP I i 1 000208 O O O O _A ' t FIGURE 31 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-15 10-1-02 REV.4 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE OR 10 IN. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTE OF COOKING SURFACE OR 10 IN. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO rGNTFP nc - (ING ING BURNER GRATE rlbUKt 3Z 000766 NOTICE Four burner grates shown in Figure 32. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at center of cooking surface. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-16 REV. 5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle Low Proximity Application (2 -Flow Nozzle): 15 in. to 20 in. (38 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low proximity application requires two (2) 290 nozzles, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91 cm). When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec- tion the nozzles must be positioned alon the cookin surface COOKING AREA LONGITUDINAL CENTERLINE COOKING AREA 9 9290 NOZZLE TIP perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at a ` I I •- -►� �. LOCATION CENTER OF 45° angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See COOKING SURFACE ± 2 IN. (5 cm) ► Figures 33 and 34. 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION 0 - 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 000239 290 NOZZLE TIP , } „OF COOKING SURFACE • y 'LOCATION 0 5 �. , s �• . r .. - .., ._ , , , - ,i . .. .. (0 - 3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE OF COOKING 45° COOKING SURFACE 45° AREA 0002eO 20 IN. I 20 IN. (51 cm)I (57 cm) COOKING MAXIMUM ' ' MAXIMUM AREA 15 IN. (38 cm) j I 115 IN. (38 cm) --r 11 MINIMUM ' I I MINIMUM It 0 0 0 0 0 0 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE ± 2 IN. (5 cm) FIGURE 33 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION 0 - 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 002276 OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 34 --- Griddle Protection 1 -Flow Nozzle The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection of griddles. One of the applications requires a 1 -flow nozzle and three of the applications require a 2 -flow nozzle. High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 1N nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating this is a one -flow noz- zle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 sq. in. (6968 sq. cm) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (91 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of 2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of the ► cooking surface. See Figure 35 and 36. NOTICE When using this type of griddle protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 gallon sys- tem and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. 1---------� MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE I +f I I I I I I IN NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. COOKING SURFACE EDGE FIGURE 35 000241 SECTION IV – SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 4-17 10-1-02 REV.5 FIGURE 36 0002x3 I I NOZZLE LOCATION ! 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) INSIDE PERIMETER Xi 40 IN. `-- OF COOKING SURFACE (102 cm) I I MAXIMUM (I ( HEIGHT OF 1N I I NOZZLE TIP II II l l I I 35 IN. (89 cm) I I MINIMUM I I EDGE I f j I I ( HEIGHT ' OF —►I I I I OF IN COOKING I I ! I NOZZLE TIP SURFACE I I l 1 FIGURE 36 0002x3 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-18 REV. 5 10-1-02 Griddle Protection 2 -Flow Nozzle Option 1 — Nozzle Center Located COOKING AREA ~ High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. NOZZLE LOCATION 1 IN. (2 cm) MAXIMUM This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2 -flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 720 sq. in. f i COOKING (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (76 cm). AREA When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the nozzle must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the center of the cook- 1 IN. cm) ► Ing surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure 38 and 37. MAXIMUM M CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE I f 1S<JRIACEt11N.(2cr?n)INy CENTERF GRIDDLE SURFACE ORA MAXIMUM�DIMEtfSIONIOF20r6'INt'_> ) •i i ) I 1 ANY DIRECTION (52 cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE I 1 FIGURE 38 1 I 50 IN. 000773 (127 cm) MAXIMUM HEIGHT 1 OF 290 NOZZLE TIP - II 30 IN. (76 cm) - MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 290 I NOZZLE I I TIP I � 1 . FIGURE 37 000244 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 39 and 40. ' FIGURE 39 000243 D. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 , Page 4-19 10-1-02 REV.3 '�— COOKING AREA 1r MIDPOINT OF 1 COOKING SURFACE I +/COOKING I I AIM POINT AREA I'— I ------ i 260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 40 000241 NOZZLE LOCATION 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) /11'1 INSIDE PERIMETEROF COOKING SURFACE (127 cm) I 1 MAXIMUM GHT I OFI2 0 / NOZZLE TIP I I I I 30 IN. (76 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT EDGE I I OF — l 1 I I OF 260 i COOKING I I I I NOZZLE TIP SURFACE 440243 ' FIGURE 39 000243 D. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 , Page 4-19 10-1-02 REV.3 '�— COOKING AREA 1r MIDPOINT OF 1 COOKING SURFACE I +/COOKING I I AIM POINT AREA I'— I ------ i 260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 40 000241 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-20 REV. 4 10-1-02 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Medium Proximity Application: 20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to 76 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See ' Figure 41 and 42. f— COOKING AREA r t CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE i L_ COOKING /T I AREA I +— AIM POINT L� I ----------1 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE. COOKING SURFACE EDGE FIGURE 41 00023, NOZZLE LOCATION 0-2IN. (0-5cm) l l INSIDE PERIMETER I 30 IN. �I I~ OF COOKING SURFACE I i (76 cm) I I I I MAXIMUM HEIGHT it OF 290 I NOZZLE TIP 2. 51 IN l MINIMUM cm) 1EIGHT )F 290 10ZZLE TIP EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE FIGURE 42 000243 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 * Page 4-21 10-1-02 REV 3 2 -Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Low Proximity Application: 10 in. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part No. 419343. The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perime- ter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 43 and 44. EDC_ COOKING SURFACE ' FIGURE 43 000243 • COOKING AREA r CENTER OF I COOKING SURFACE I �i COOKING ,/ I AREA L I f— AIM POINTFn � I ---------_j 2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE.' ' FIGURE 44 000241 I I NOZZLE LOCATION 0-2IN. (0-5cm) I I INSIDE PERIMETER 1 20 IN. —►I �— OF COOKING SURFACE I I (51 cm) I I MAXIMUM ��p HEIGHT ypr7"'2! OF 2120 NOZZLE TIP I I lip,cm) I MINIMUM I HEIGHT I / OF 2120 II NOZZLE TIP ;� 000240 ' FIGURE 43 000243 • COOKING AREA r CENTER OF I COOKING SURFACE I �i COOKING ,/ I AREA L I f— AIM POINTFn � I ---------_j 2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE.' ' FIGURE 44 000241 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-22 REV. 3 10-1-02 Chain Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two 1N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) for chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being pro- tected). Two 1N nozzles are alwad d f h ' b 'I Overhead Chain Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) for overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1W, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. ys nee a or c aIn mer protection Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the "Overhead Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum inter- internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal, broiler nal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (30.5 x 30.5 cm). Internal must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x 34 in. (81 x 86 cm). 1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a max- imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening. The When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be centered nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they are at above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm) of each opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to discharge other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) above ► diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 45 and 46. ► the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 47. i `y 4-8 IN. (10-20 cm) MAXIMUM IN BROILER S12 (109 X 79 cm 000245 FIGURE 45 046 NOW b. 12 IN. (30.5 cm) MINIMUM MAXIMUM INTERNAL BROILER SIZE - 32 X 34 IN. (81 x 86 cm) FIGURE 47 000248 The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly spaced from the exhaust center and are always 180° opposite of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be posi- tioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the open- ing. See Figure 48. TOP VIEW TOP VIEW FIGURE 48 000M Overhead Chain Broiler Protection (Continued) Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide (61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in. (40.6 x 40.6 cm). To determine minimum opening size, multiply the internal length and the internal width by 0.6: Length of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Width of opening - 20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in. (51 cm x 0.6 = 30.5 cm) The minimum allowable opening for overhead protec- tion would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm). This example would be acceptable for overhead pro- tection. Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in.'wide (76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in. (56 x 30 cm). To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal length and internal width by 0.6: Length of opening - 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in. (76 cm x 0.6 = 45.7 cm) Width of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm). Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in., the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable cal- culated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and therefore would not be acceptable for overhead protection. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-23 10-1-02 REV.5 Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) for all upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1/2N, indicating that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair of these noz- zles will equal one flow number. Two 1/2N nozzles will protect a maximum hazard area (internal broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These noz= zles must always be used in pairs on an uprig ht/sa[amander broil- er. One nozzle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at , the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second noz- zle must be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through ► the open slot. See Figure 49. NOTE: If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broiler or salamander broiler protection, use (2) two IN nozzles, Part No. ► 56930, instead of 1/2N nozzles. SALAMANDER BROILER UPRIGHT BROILER BROILER CHAMBER SIDE VIEW 000251 000252 FIGURE 49 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-24 REV. 5 10-1-02 Electric Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N nozzle for the protection of electric char -broilers. The maximum length of the hazard can be no longer than 34 in. (86 cm) and the total cooking area must not exceed 680 sq. in. (4388 sq. cm). 1. Nozzle Location: 20 to 50 in. (51 to 127 cm) above the grate surface. The 1N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) is used for electric char - broiler applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1N, indi- cating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle for electric char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at ► the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 50. COOKING AREA �-�COOKING AREA � I I I I i I I I � I t 50 IN. \ I (127 cm) 1 I MAXIMUM I $ I i I 21 I MS NI i UM 000250 FIGURE 50 Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N nozzle, (Part No. 419335) for gas - radiant char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip on the 1 N nozzle is stamped with a 1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow .number. One IN nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of 36 in. (91 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 15 to 40 in. (38 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for gas -radiant char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of the cooking sur - fare. See Figure 51. P. 40'j (102 cm) I i I MAXIMUM 15 IN 1 (38 cm) { X/' I MINIMUM 000251 FIGURE 51 Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the IN Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all lava rock char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length. of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 35 in. (46 to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this noz- zle for lava rock (ceramic) char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 52. COOKING AREA �COOKING AREA I � � I I Y I I 1 I I I I I ( I I I ! I 'I I� 35 IN. ( I I MAXIMUM MINIMUM � / I I I I MINIMUM 000259 FIGURE 52 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 - Page 4-25 10-1-02 REV.6 Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One IN nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using . this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. ► See Figure 53. The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING COOKING AREA AREA I I I I I I I I I i I `I I� 40 IN. (102 cm) MAXIMUM I I I 4 IN. (10 cm) I I I 18 IN. MAXIMUM I I (46 cm) DEPTH I \ ) MINIMUM I I I ( 000259 FIGURE 53 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-26 REV. 5 10-1-02 Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char -broiler Protection ► Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system may also use the 3N nozzle (Part No. 419338) for all ceramic (lava rock) and natural charcoal char -broiler protec- tion. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 54. For natural charcoal char -boiler protection, this coverage only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING AREA COOKING AREA I � I I I I I I I I I ( I I I I I I 'I I� I i 401N. (102 cm) ( i MAXIMUM I / I 1 I I 4 IN. (10 cm) I I I 14 IN. MAXIMUM I I (36 cm) DEPTH I 1 } MINIMUM I I 1 I 000259 The R-102 system uses the 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) for mesquite char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. ► See Figure 55. ► Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in. (10 cm) in diameter, may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of 6 in. (15 cm). COOKING J a.'." r AREA :v "- i! COOKING AREA \>i Y I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I i 41 I I I (102 cm) `I I MAXIMUM � / I 1 61N. (15 cm) I I I 14 IN MAXIMUM I I (36 cm) DEPTH I \\ I ) MINIMUM I I 000259 FIGURE 54 ' FIGURE 55 Wok Protection The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection of woks. 1. A 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341, will protect a wok 14 in. (36 cm) minimum diameter up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (9.5 cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a two - flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as ► shown in Figure 56. NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (2 cm) RADIUS OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN 260 NOZZLE I 35 — IN. (89 45 — MINIMUM DEPTH 3.75 IN. (9.6 114 cm) cm) MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (20 cm) I t �► 14 IN. (35.6 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 30 IN. (76.2 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER FIGURE 56 000261 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-27 10-1-02 REV.4 2. A 1 N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, will protect a wok 11 in. (28 cm) minimum diameter up to 24 in. (61 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3 in. (8 cm) and no greater than 6 in. (15 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the wok, aimed at the center, 30 in. to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the ► hazard surface, as shown in Figure 57. NOTICE When using this type of wok protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1 1/2 gallon system, and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. I ( ( 401N. ( ` I ( I (102 cm) i � 1 I / 130 1N. � I ) (76 cm) MINIMUM DEPTH 3.0 IN. (7.6 cm) MAXIMUM DEPTH T 6.0 IN. (15 cm) t 11 IN. (28 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 24 IN. (61 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER FIGURE 57 000261 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-28 REV. 3 10-1-02 Nozzle Application Chart The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum, or appliance. NOTICE This chart is for general reference only. See complete details for each type of hazard. ' Minimum Nozzle Tip Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping — Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — 430912 1100 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 50 in. (127 cm) Diameter — 16 in. (40.6 cm) ► Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — 419337 2W (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 100 in. (254 cm) ! t '; t.31 7/$ r•,3 ! f.., ► Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 2 — 419337 2W (Dual Nozzle) Perimeter — 150 in. (381 cm) Diameter — 48 in. (122 cm) Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 — 419334 1/2N (At Base of Duct) ► Plenum Length — 10 ft. (3.1 m) 1 — 419335 1 N (Horizontal Protection) ► Plenum Length — 6 ft. (1.8 m) 1 — 430192 1100 I(Horizontal Protection) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 — 419336 1W I Plenum Length — 4 ft. (1.2 m) 1 419336 1W ► (Vertical Protection) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) Fryer/Split Vat Fryer" Maximum Size (without drip board) 15 in. (38 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) High Proximity 1 27 — 47 in. 419339 230 Medium Proximity 1 20 — 27 in. 419340 245 Maximum Size (without drip board) 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 21 — 34 in. 419338 3N Low Proximity 1 13 — 16 in. 419342 290 Maximum Size (without drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 18 in. (45.7 cm) High Proximity 1 25 — 35 in. 419338 3N (64-89 cm) For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-12 through 4.14. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 , Page 4-29 10-1-02 REV.3 Nozzle Part No. 419339 419340 419338 419342 High Proximity 1 25 — 35 in. 419338 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) (64-89 cm) Range Longest Side 1 Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Fryer/Split Vat Fryer" Maximum Size (102 — 122 cm) (with drip board) (With Backshelo 21 in. (53 cm) x 40 — 50 in. 419340 14 in. (36 cm) (102 — 127 cm) (Fry Pot must not exceed 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm)) High Proximity 1 27 — 47 in Medium Proximity 1 20 — 27 in Maximum Size (with drip board) 25 3/8 in. (64.4 cm) x 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) ' (Fry pot side must not exceed 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 21 — 34 in. Low Proximity 1 13 — 16 in. Maximum Size (with drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 27 5/8 in. (70.2 cm) SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 , Page 4-29 10-1-02 REV.3 Nozzle Part No. 419339 419340 419338 419342 High Proximity 1 25 — 35 in. 419338 (4335 sq. cm) (64-89 cm) Range Longest Side 1 30 — 50 in. 419333 28 in. (71 cm) (76 — 127 cm) Area — 336 sq. in. 40 — 48 in. (2168 sq. cm) (102 — 122 cm) ' (4955 sq. cm) (With Backshelo Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 40 — 50 in. 419340 28 in. (71 cm) (102 — 127 cm) Nozzle Tip Stamping — Flow No. 230 245 3N 290 3N 1F 245 Area — 672 sq. in. (4335 sq. cm) Longest Side (Medium Proximity) 1 30 — 40 in. 419341 260 ► 32 in. (81 cm) (76 — 102 cm) Area — 768 sq. in. ' (4955 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 15 — 20 in. 419342 290 36 in. (91 cm) (38 — 51 cm) Area — 1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-7 through 4-11. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-30 REV. 3 10-1-02 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) ► Minimum Nozzle Tip Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No. Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 - 50 in 419341 260 48 in. (122 cm) (76-127 cm) 2 10 - 26 in. Area - 1440 sq. in. (perimeter (Overhead Protection) Area - 1088 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) located) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 - 50 in. 419342 290 30 in. (76 cm) (76 - 127 cm) Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) Area - 720 sq. in. (center located) 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS (4645 sq. cm) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) (3 - 8 cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 — 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 36 in. (91 cm) (89 - 102 cm) 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Area - 1080 sq. in. (perimeter located) (38 - 102 cm) (6968, sq; cm) 4 ' L"ongest,Side 1 20 - 30 in. 419342 290 (Medium Proximity) (51 - 76 cm) 48 in. (122 cm) (perimeter 1 20 - 50 in. Area - 1440 sq. in. located) Area - 680 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) (51 - 127 cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 - 20 in. 419343 2120 48 in. (122 cm) (25 - 51 cm) Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) Area - 1440 sq. in. (perimeter 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS (9290 sq. cm) located) (46 - 89 cm) Chain Broiler* Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 2 10 - 26 in. 419336/417333 1 W/1 WSS (Overhead Protection) Area - 1088 sq. in. (25 - 66 cm) (7019 sq. cm) Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 - 3 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS (Horizontal Protection) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) (3 - 8 cm) Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Longest Side - 36 in. (91 cm) 1 15 - 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Area - 864 sq. in. (38 - 102 cm) (5574 sq. cm) Electric Char -Broiler Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 50 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Area - 680 sq. in. (51 - 127 cm) (4388 sq. cm) Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 35 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Area - 312 sq. in. (46 - 89 cm) (2013 sq. cm) Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 - 40 in. 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS Area - 288 sq. in. (46 - 102 cm) (1858 sq. cm) Lava -Rock or Natural Longest Side - 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 - 40 in. 419338 3N Charcoal Char -Broiler Area - 720 sq. in. (36 - 102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening — 12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size. SECTION IV SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 . Page 4-31 10-1-02 REV 5 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights ► Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 —140 in. Area — 720 sq. in. (36 — 102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) Upright Broiler Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 — Width — 30 in. (76 cm) Salamander Length — 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 — Broiler Width — 30 in. (76 cm) Wok 14<in. — 30 in. (36 — 76 cm) 1 '35 — 45.in. Diameter (89 — 114 cm) 3.75 — 8.0 in. (9.5 — 20 cm) Deep 11 in. — 24 in. (28 — 61 cm) 30 — 40 in. Diameter (89 — 102 cm) 3.0 — 6.0 in. (8 — 15.2 cm) Deep Nozzle Tip Nozzle Stamping — Part No. Flow No. 419338 3N 419334 1/2N 419334 1/2N 419341 260 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-32 REV. 4 10-1-02 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 GTI, 120,000 BTU/hr. Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination of a 290 nozzle (Part No. 419342) and a 1W nozzle (Part No. ► 419336) (or 1100) for low proximity (7 3/4 — 8 in. nozzle height only) and two (2) 230 nozzles, Part No. 419339, for high proximity (45 in. nozzle height only). The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (61 x 61 cm). ► Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 58. FRY POT CENTERLINE 8 IN. 1 1/8 IN. (20 cm) 1 1/8 IN. f (2.9 cm) cm 1 W NOZZLE OR 1100 6 IN. _y 290 NOZZLE—► 1 (15 cm) I}r� 1 AIM POINT I 73/4-81N.ONLY � � I 1 TOP OF VAT I (19.7-20.3 cm) L --------I L -------I 000282 LOW PROXIMITY (7 314 — 8 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT) NOTE: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout in y 21/4 IN. ► Figure 59. 2 1/4 w. (5.7 cm) (5.7 cm) FRONT EDGE 'a. h OF FRY POT ,...6'230 NOZZLE_'. '�.. 11 IN. (53 cm) 45 IN. ONLY 1 (114 cm) TOP OF FRYER ►I Lill[ AIM POINT--------/ L----- J HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY) 000283 Dean Industries Model GTI Gas Fryer Special Piping Layout FIGURE 58 Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations b. Maximum Length: 30 Ft. (9.1 m) Maximum Rise: 6 Ft. (1.8 m) Maximum Number of 90° Elbows: 7 Maximum Number of Tees: 0 TO 3 GALLON TANK SECTION A -► HOOD PI 2 11/16 IN. (6.9 cm) Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations 1. Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. tolerance on dimensions. 2. All nozzles shall be at the same elevation. 3. Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from left-to-right centerline of fryer. ® 1 W (OR 1100) 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or 24 IN. (60.9 cm) 1W (OR 1100) r I�1W (OR 1100) 2 1/4 IN. 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or (5.7 cm) 24 IN. (60.9 cm) 2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm) (75.2 cm) ® 290 1W (OR / 2 1/4 IN. 1100) 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or (5.7 cm) 24 IN. (60.9 cm) 2 1/4 IN. - (5.7 cm) SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF (4) FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL GTI GAS FRYERS FIGURE 59 000294 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) n Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR -1-20, 63000 BTU/hr Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a single, 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (53 x 53 cm). The 290 nozzle must be located on the front -to -rear centerline and ' aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 60. 4 1/2 IN. (11.5 cm) 1 � 14IN. (36 cm) 13 IN i. SIDE VIEW OF FRYER 000295 BACK OF FRYER 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ON FRONT -TO -REAR CENTERLINE ± 4.5 IN. (11.4 cm) FROM SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AND AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING AREA. I P. FIGURE 60 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-33 10-1-02 REV.5 Frymaster 14 KW — 208V Electric Fryer, Model MACH 14 Series This specialized single vat electric fryer can be protected either with a single 230 nozzle, Part No. 419339, located 27 in. to 47 in. (69 cm to 120 cm) above the top surface of the fryer or with a sin- gle 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, located 20 in. to 27 in. (51 cm to 69 cm) above the top surface of the fryer. Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint. See Figure 104. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 16 3/4 in. (35 cm x 42.6 cm) and the maximum size of the cooking surface (with drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 20 7/8 in. (35 cm x 53 cm). The vat may be divided in half to make two split vats. 230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT. 20 7/8 IN. . 230 NOZZLE MAXIMUM ____1UM 230 NOZZLE 245 27 IN. — 47 IN. NOZZLE (69 cm — 120 cm) 13 3/4 N. I / ABOVE TOP f SURFACE (35 cm) OF FRYER MAXIMUM 245 NOZZLE Ij 20 IN. — 27 IN. (51 cm — 69 cm) ABOVE TOP SURFACE OF FRYER 16 3/4 IN. (42.6 cm) MAXIMUM b. FIGURE 61 OW209 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-34 REV. 5 10-1-02 .SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic Converter McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 In.) Protection When the 245 nozzle is used to protect McDonald's fryers at NOTE: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard heights less than 20 in. (51 cm) above the top of the fryer, the fol- chain broiler protection options. lowing appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply: Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960) 1. Each McDonald's gas or electric fryer shall be protected by are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean one 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The fryer vat dimensions for air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these one full vat or two split vats shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in. broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these broil (36 cm x 38 cm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in. ers are as follows: (36 cm x 53 cm) with the dripboard. — The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74 cm The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000 x 60 cm). BTU/HR. — An R-102 3 -gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow numbers, The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (46 cm to must be used for protection of each broiler, including plenum 51 cm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1/4 in. (5 cm to and duct. 5.7 cm) to the right or left of the front -to -rear vat centerline, — Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of (2) and 0 to 3 1/4 in. (0 cm to 8 cm,) forward of the right to-left.vat ,t,o; 1 N` nozzles, Parts No. -419335. TF e' nozzles must be locat ► centerline, and aimed at the'vaf center poinf See•Fidb�e�62. �' ed as shown in Figure 63. REAR FRONT -To -REAR — The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent bar - VAT CENTERLINE riers on the angled surface of the broiler. See Figure 106. If these have not been completed by the equipment supplier, they must be added in the field. 30° RIGH LEFTEFT VAT LA7 AIM CENTERLINE / POINT(2) 1 N NOZZLES I PART NO. 56930 -� NOZZLE 31/4 LOCATION IN. ZONES 2 IN. 2 IN. 2 1/4 IN. 2 1/4 IN. 12 IN. TO 13 IN. (31 cm TO 33 cm) FRONT ► FIGURE 62 002297 2. The distance between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (201 cm). 3. The total length of all branch lines shall not exceed 162 in. (412 cm). 4. The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec- tions between the supply and branch lines. 5. The requirements of the following table shall not be exceeded: Duct Plenum Appliance Supply Branch Branch Branch Requirement Line Line Line Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in. (356 cm) (170 cm) (15 cm) (107 cm) Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in. (206 cm) (10 cm) (10 cm) (43 cm) Maximum 5 3 1 6 90° Elbows Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1 Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2 Numbers Minimum Flow 5 0 0 1/2 Numbers L_- Q D 14.25'± 1 IN. (36 cm) 000250 LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm) ON EACH SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE 14.25 ± 1 IN. (36 cm) E 000174 FIGURE 63 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 . Page 4-35 10-1-02 REV.3 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (With Catalytic Converters) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (Without Catalytic Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. . Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 12 in. (305 mm) above top of converter. See Figure 64. .Nozzle Height: 20 1/2 in. (521 mm) above top of appliance. See ► Figure 65. • Nozzle Location: 3 in. (76 mm) back from front edge of con- verters, centered from right to left above each converter. See ► Figure 64. appliance. See Figure 65. ► • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. See Figure 64. Figure 65. _ r r �I I� 3 IN. ! (76 mm) I / 6112 IN. > (165 mm) f SIDEVIEW I k (2) 2W NOZZLES CENTERLINE CONVERTERS � 18-20 1/2 IN. I l 12 IN. CENTER CENTER LINE LINE OF OF CONVER ER CONVERTER FRONT VIEW (305 mm) FIGURE 64 004354 SIDE VIEW k . 1 (2) 2W NOZZLES CENTERLINE OF OPENING 18-20 1/2 IN. FRONT VIEW (457.521 mm) I I i k CENTERLINE CENTERLINE OF OPENING OF OPENING FRONT VIEW FIGURE 65 004355 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-36 REV. 2 10-1-02 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler— Model 9025 (With Engelhard Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. ►• Nozzle Height: 18 in. (457 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 66. • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 66. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each broiler opening. ' See Figure 66. SIDE VIEW 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FRONT VIEW FIGURE 66 NMW8 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747' Page 4-37 10-1-02 REV.3 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9015 (With Catalytic Converters) Nieco Broiler — Model 9015 (Without Catalytic Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 13 1/2 in. (343 mm) above top of converter. See • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See ► Figure 67. Figure 68. • Nozzle Location: 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) back from front edge of con- • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of verters, centered from right to left above each converter. See ► appliance. See Figure 68. ► Figure 67. • Nozzle Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at center of • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See ► opening. See Figure 68. ► Figure 67. • Nozzle Aiming Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be locat- ed 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle. 1/2 IN. 38 mm) (2) 2W NOZZLES # i , CONVERTERS I I 131/2 IN. (343 mm) FRONT VIEW FIGURE 67 006087 — 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) (2) 2W NOZZLES d Y 12 IN. (305 mm) 20 IN. (508 mm) I CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONTVIEW ' FIGURE 68 006486 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-38 REV. 4 10-1-02 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Marshall Air — Model 2001 BK Multi -Chamber Broiler • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1W nozzles, Part No. 419347. • Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. direct- ly above the appliance, aligned with the front face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. forward of the front edge of the converter on the centerline. The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear noz- zle is located 14 in. vertically above the appliance, aligned with the "rear" face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. behind the "rear" edge of the converter on the cen- terline. • System Limitation: Maximum of 5 flows for a 3.0 gallon sys- tem: Remaining flow points available may be used to protect other hazards. CENTERED ON CONVERTER CONVERTER TWO 1W NOZZLES i I 003418• FRONT VIEW NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED AIMED 4 IN. (102 mm) BACK 4 IN. (102 mm) FORWARD 1W 1W NOZZLE NOZZLE 14IN. 14 IN. (3 56 mm) I -*r (102 4 IN. -1-1(356+mm) + mm) + 0074159 SIDE VIEW FIGURE 69 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-39 10-1-02 REV.3 ► SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Grease Grabber -801" Two Stage Filtration System The Grease Grabber -80 Two Stage Filtration System consists of two components: The primary filter (The Grease -X Tractor) and the secondary filter (The Grease Grabber -80). The protection required for this application is the same as the stan- dard plenum/filter protection: One (1) 1N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, protecting 10 (3.1 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft. (1.2 m) of plenum chamber depth (width), positioned 2-4 in. (5-10 cm) from peak of secondary filter. See Figure 70. E NOTE: TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTILIZED FOR V -BANK FILTER ARRANGEMENT. FIGURE 70 OM26 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-40 REV. 2 10-1-02 TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flow numbers are established, the quantity and size of agent tanks and cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper volumes of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. For cartridges used in the regulated release mechanism, flow capacities, tank quantities and sizes, and regulated release cartridge options are given in the table below. Total Quantity and Regulated Release Flow Size of Cartridge Options Numbers* Tank(s) Nitrocien Carbon Dioxide 1— 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon LT -20-R 101-10 6-11 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT -30-R 101-20 11-16 (1) 1.5 Gallon Double 101-30 (1) 3.0 Gallon ' 16 — 22 (2) 3.0 Gallon;f Double, x ; 101`-30**,, When one or more regulated actuators are used, the following tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actuator: Regulated Actuator Regulated Actuator Tank(s) — Cartridge (1) 1.5 Gallon LT -20-R or 101-10 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT -30-R or 101-20 (1) 1.5 Gallon and LT -A-101-30 or 101-30** or (1) 3.0 Gallon double tank (2) 3.0 Gallon LT -A-101-30 or 101-30** or ' double tank For exceptions to maximum flow numbers, see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5 gal- lon and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section. •• The 101.30 cartridge can not be used when (2) two 3.0 gallon tanks are manifolded together.) For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges and regulated actuators are required as shown in the System Selection Guide in Section IX — Appendix. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT -20-R, MAXIM, M LEN T OF 20 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT. (6 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mechanism reg- ulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each agent tank. These limitations should be considered when selecting the com- ponent mounting locations. Actuation Gas Line — 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actuator assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an ' LT20 R an j-,30 -'R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101 _1o;or a' 101-.: , 20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 71. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION / GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS REGULATED r ACTUATOR REGULATED ACTUATOR FIGURE 71 000775 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Actuation Gas Line — 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum (Continued) 3. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank' nitrogen car- tridge or a LT -A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 carbon ► dioxide cartridge. See Figure 72. 4. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15* Tanks Maximum 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used. See Component Section for detailed information. ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A `DOUBLE TANK' CARTRIDGE OR A 101.30 CARTRIDGE OR A LT -A-101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH — 30 FT. (9 m) MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS — 9 SAFETY RELIEF VALVE EXPELLANT REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY "ANSULAUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 1 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 4-41 10-1-02 REV.2 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101 remote mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actuator assem- bly. The total length of the actuation gas line from the remote mechanical release to the regulated actuator assemblies must not exceed 100 ft. (30.5 m). 3. A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used in these lines. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. See ► Figure 73. ► 4. Use only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101 remote mechanical release. 5. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actuation. 1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE — REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS FIGURE 72 000262 20 ELBOWS 9TEES MAXIMUM MAXIMUM REGULATED ACTUATOR WITH TANK AGEN TANK MAXIMUM OF FIVE REGULATED ACTUATORS 1 REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS (PART NO. 32381) 5 MAXIMUM ► FIGURE 73 ouaw, b. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-42 REV. 3 10-1-02 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Expellant Gas Line 1. The expellant gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism in double and multiple -tank systems, and from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple -tank sys- tems. The expellant gas line is the piping between the regula- tor and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket assembly. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" cartridge, an LT -A-101-30 Cartridge, or a 101-30 Cartridge. See Figures 74 and 75. Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter- mined, it is then necessary to determine the piping configurations between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This section contains the -guidelines and limitations for designing the distribu- tlon:.piping.-so that the liquid agent will discharge from the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also be referred to when selecting the mounting location for the regulated release mechanism and agent tank. 2. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. 3. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly in a multiple -tank system arrangement, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen car- tridge, an LT -A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-30 carbon ► dioxide cartridge. See Figure 72. DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS — 9� EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH — 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS — 9 i REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY General Piping Requirements 1. All R-102 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need for critical lengths and balancing is minimized. 2 Two 45° elbows count as one 90° elbow. I-, :-,n 3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and "ANSUL AUTOMAN" all fittings within the branch line itself. REGULATED RELEASE 4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from ASSEMBLY the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok must be 6 ft. (1.8 m). 5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of FIGURE 74 ► fitting. See Figure 76. 000778 CENTER TO CENTER ' FIGURE 76 000778 6. All distribution piping must be Schedule 40 black iron, chrome - plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped galvanized pipe on the distribution piping. ' 7. All threaded connections located in and above the protected area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. 8. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opeing in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the exterior of the blow -off cap. This will help keep cooking grease ► from building up on the can FIGURE 75 000777 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 4-43 10-1-02 REV.3 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification ► SUPPLY LINE The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down into four The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, appli- the Plenum Branch Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See ance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line fittings ► Figure 77. except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines. See DUCT Figures 77 and 78. BRANCH LINE n PLENUM APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY. THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION. FIGURE 77 000779 NOTE: THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED. END OF SUPPLY LINE END OF �, ••,� SUPPLY LINE � 3 v r END OF SUPPLY LINE BRANCH LINE CANNOT START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE END OF SUPPLY LINE SUPPLY LINE 0 SUPPLY (NOZZLES FOR LINE TEE PLENUM PROTECTION) C (NOZZLES FOR \ PLENUM PROTECTION) BRANCH LINE CANNOT START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE FIGURE 78 000780 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-44 REV. 3 10-1-02 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued) NOTICE Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply line tee. DUCT BRANCH LINE The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line. ► See Figures 78 and 79. DUCT BRANCH LINE (ELBOW INCLUDED) ,.1 DUCT BRANCH LINE" (TEE INCLUDED) DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 79 000791 PLENUM BRANCH LINE The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the ►branch line. See Figures 77 and 80. j PLENUM BRANCH LINE - �'\•' (TEE INCLUDED) i PLENUM BRANCH LINE 11' (TEE INCLUDED) i FIGURE 80 000781 APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the ► branch line. See Figures 78 and 81. I i I 1 APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 81 00079] DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 1.5 Gallon System ' DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION 1. This option allows for duct protection, plenum protection, appliance protection, or any combination. ' 2. When using a combination of plenum and duct protection only, ' only one duct nozzle, either a 1 W, 1100, or a 2W; may be used. 3. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel. 4. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow numbers.' 5. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). When the supply line is split, the combined length of both legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last branch line) must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). See Figure 82. 6. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22 ft. ► (6.7 m). See Figure 83. 7. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: P. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-45. 10-1-02 REV.1 SUPPLY LINE TEE START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE START OF LAST BRANCH LINE START OF FIRST \ BRANCH LINE \+ 1 \ TOTAL LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 8 FT. / (2.4 m) START OF LAST BRANCH LINE FIGURE 82 000794 1 IN NOZZLE (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 22 FT. (6.7 m) FIGURE 83 000795 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements SuDDIV Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 10 ft. (12.2 m) (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (3 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° Elbow 9 4 4 6 Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3 Maximum Flow Numbers 5- 2 2 3 Exceptions: 1. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when a duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping network and no 1N nozzles, Part No. 56930, are used to protect woks or griddles. - 2. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when six (6) 1 N nozzles, Part No. 56930, are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks and griddles. NOTE: Only five (5) Flow numbers are allowed if a 1N nozzle is used for wok or griddle protection. ► 3. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when only two (2) 3N nozzles, Part No. 76782, are used. ► SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-46 REV. 3 10-1-02 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 3.0 Gallon System 1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 84. 2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 84. 3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. 5. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: SUPPLY TEE COMBINED LENGTH OF BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY LINE MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) V000266 3 BRANCH LINES 1N NOZZLE 1/2N NOZZLE (BRANCH LINE IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT. (10.9 m) FIGURE 84 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4 Numbers 'Exceptions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank not containing two -flow appliance nozzles, and/or, a 1N nozzle for wok or griddle protection, and/or, a 1F nozzle for range protection, and/or. a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. ► 2. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for hood and duct protection. 3. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two -flow appliance nozzles. 4. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance nozzles. Special Instructions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed when four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 101 on Page 4.52. The discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 102 on Page 4-52. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, one (1) 1 N plenum nozzle, and four (4) two -flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering Department for additional information. DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System ►As an option to piping two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks separately, two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common agent distribution line. Only (2) 3.0 gallon tanks connected to the same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements ► must be met when manifolding: 1. All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40. ► 2. See Figure 86 for tank connections. 3. The length of supply line piping between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not ► exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 85. When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). 4. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. ► (10.9 m). See Figure 85. 5. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed. 6. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded. Requirements Pipe Size Maximum Length Maximum Rise Maximum 90° Elbows Maximum Tees Maximum Flow Numbers SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 • Page 4-47 10-1-02 REV.2 LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) FROM START OF FIRST BRANCH UNE TO START OF LAST BRANCH LINE START OF LAST BRANCH LINE 2W NOZZLES" 1N 'ZLE 2 FLOW APPLIANCE NOZZLE (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT. (10.9 m) 2 22 2 4 2 2 4 4 ZZLE FIGURE 85 000267 Duct Plenum Appliance Suggly Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 32 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (9.7 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) 8 4 4 6 2 22 2 4 2 2 4 4 ZZLE FIGURE 85 000267 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-48 REV. 2 10-1-02 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded When using the hose/grommet package, independent pipe runs System (Continued) can also be used with the regulated release assembly and the This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are 'tank/enclosure assembly. See Figure 87. NOTE: When manifold - connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from a I ing is not used, each of the two (2) 3 gallon tanks utilize the piping single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the regu- ► limitations of a single tank system. ' lated release assembly. See Figure 86.—{1rJIf�---� 3/8 IN. t 3/8 IN. 318 IN. BRANCH SUPPLY SUPPLY SEE USE HOSE/ ~— NOTE GROMMET HOSE! PACKAGEGROMMET I � 3!8 IN BRANCH (PART NO. 3!8 IN. PACKAGE I 418511) SUPPLY (PART NO. SEE I 418511) NOTE i ❑❑El 1-1 3.0 3.0 GALLON GALLON 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON TANK TANK TANK TANK DOUBLE TANK OR OR _ NITROGEN 1.5 GALLON 1.5 GALLON CARTRIDGE OR TANK TANK LT -A-101-30 CARTRIDGE (REGULATED 3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ACTUATOR ONLY REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED ' REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY CARTRIDGE OR TANK/ENCLOSURE LT -A-101-30 CARTRIDGE (REGULATED ACTUATOR ONLY) TANKIENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY ' FIGURE 87 NOTE 1: THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK 000786 CENTER CANNOT EXCEED 8-1/2 IN. (21.5 cm). ALSO, OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN MANIFOLDING 3.0 GALLON TANK. NOTE 2: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED. FIGURE 86 000272 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0 Gallon System ► This optional configuration consists only of three 3 -gallon tanks, all pressurized from a single double -tank nitrogen cartridge with P. expellant gas hoses connected as shown in Figure 88. Tanks No. 1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with sepa- rate expellant gas hoses and Tank No. 3 must be connected to ► Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure 88. Each tank must be connected to an independent distribution pip- ► ing network as shown in Figure 88. Distribution piping require- ments for each network must be as follows: 1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. ► (7.3 m). See Figure 84. 2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. (10.9 m). See Figure 84. 3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 - Page 4-49 10-1-02 REV.2 ❑ El ❑ 3.0 3.0 3.0 GALLON GALLON GALLON I TANK TANK TANK ' NO. 3 NO. 2 NO. 1 5. When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no mani- folding of distribution piping is allowed. ' TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN 6. When an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release is utilized in ASSEMBLY PART NO. 419604 (INCLUDES (2) _ RELEASE ASSEMBLY, CARTRIDGE OR OR 3 GALLON LT -A-101-30 CARTRIDGE this configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be HOSES AND (2) REGULATED ACTUATOR (REGULATED ACTUATOR used. GROMMETS) ASSEMBLY ONLY) ' FIGURE 88 Only 3 gallon tanks can be utilized in this configuration. OW007 8. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded ► for each 3 gallon tank: Duct Plenum Appliance Reauirements SuDoly Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line PipetSize 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. ` (12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90° 9 - 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4 Numbers 'Exceptions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any tank not containing two -flow appliance nozzles. and/or, a 1N nozzle for wok or griddle protection, and/or, a 1F nozzle for range protec- tion, and/or, a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. 2. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two -flow appliance nozzles. ' 3. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance nozzles. Special Instructions: . ' 1. When four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 58 on Page 4-32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 59 on ► Page 4.32. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle,. one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, _ one (1) IN plenum nozzle, and four (4) two -flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering Department for additional information. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-50 REV. 2 10-1-02 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Once the fire suppression system design has been determined, a detection system design must be completed. This section contains guidelines and limitations for detection system installation. Detector Identification The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by their location in the detection system. 1. The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) is the last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single -detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates" 2. A Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any detector located in-line between the regulated release mech- anism and the terminal detector. Detecto"r/Pulley,Elbow'Quantity.i The quantity of detectors used in the system will vary depending on the style of detector used. 1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per sys- tem must be within the approved system guidelines. The fol- lowing requirements must not be exceeded: Maximum Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Length of 1/2 Detectors Elbows in. Conduit per System per System per System Clip on Style 12 18 125 ft. (38.1 m) Detector Hinge Style 5 8 103 ft. (31.3 m) Detector Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft. (45.7 m) Detector 2. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip - on or scissor style, 4 series and 1 terminal is the maximum number allowed. If clip -on style are mixed with scissor style, the maximum allowed is 11 series and 1 terminal. NOTICE When using the "clip -on" style detector, the ter- minal detector may use the "hinged" style mounting bracket with the "clip -on" style linkage. This is only allowed with the terminal detector. No other linkages are allowed to be mixed with other brackets. When using this option, the total number of "clip -on" style detectors (11 series and 1 terminal) is still allowed. 3. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip - on or scissor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 103 ft. (31.4 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 8. If clip -on style are mixed with scis- sor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 125 ft. (3.81 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 18. 4. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five 101 Remote Releases (Part No. 12029) can be used for system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use of a maxi- mum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and 1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed. Detector Placement Requirements EXHAUST DUCTS Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in the duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors, or at ► a maximum of 20 ft. (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See Figure 89. „MAXIMUM,: a.... _ ► FIGURE 89 UW271 NOTICE When gas appliances are used and the flue gases from the burner are exhausted into the duct, the detector must be kept out of the air stream of these exhaust gases. These gases can be very hot and could actuate the system unnecessarily. Duct openings that are long and narrow or large enough to require multiple duct nozzles may require additional detectors. ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of the exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the pre- cipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the duct, ► just above the precipitator. See Figure 90. When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator. IL ► FIGURE 90 OW268 Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued) COOKING APPLIANCES If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the detector ► is not more than 12 in. (30 cm) into the duct. See Figure 91. APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE REQUIRES COVERED BY COVERED BY REQUIRES SEPARATE DETECTOR DETECTOR SEPARATE DETECTOR UNDER DUCT .UNDER DUCT DETECTOR 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) 415742 360 °F (182 °C) ► FIGURE 91 000209 Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (122 x 122 cm) can be protected by a min- imum of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continuous cook- ing surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. can be protected by at least one detector per 48 in. x 48 in. cooking area. Detectors used for cooking appliances must be located within the perimeter of the protected appliance toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector should be located in the air stream of the appliance to enhance system response time. Detection Line Requirements CONDUIT Rigid conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin-wall conduit may be used. Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recommend- ed) must be employed to properly install the detection system. All conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When using pipe, make certain that all ends are carefully reamed, deburred and blown clear of chips and scale before assembly. NOTICE The conduit offset can be used at the top or bot- tom of the regulated release to change direction of the conduit. The conduit offset cannot be used with pulley tees. All other changes in direc- tion must be made by using Ansul approved pul- ley elbows, Part No. 423254 or 415670. See ► Figure 92. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 - Page 4-51 10-1-02 REV.2 7 FIGURE 92 000270 Fusible Link Selection When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature rat- ing. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum regis- tering thermometer, Part No. 15240, temperature tape or any other accurate thermometer. o AN9Vl• Temperature To Be Used Where Fusible Link Rating TEMPERATURE RATING C� STAMPED ON FUSIBLE C.; 0 LINK BODY 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) 000170 K STYLE _ 000,7, ML STYLE - 150 °F (66 °C) 500 -F (260 °C) ONLY ► FIGURE 93 Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below: Temperature To Be Used Where Fusible Link Rating Temperature Does Part No. (See Figure 79) Not Exceed 415739 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) 415740 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C) 415741 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) 415742 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C) 415743 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C) 56816 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C) SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-52 REV. 1 10-1-02 MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be man- ually operated at some point distant from the regulated release assembly. The pull station should be installed at a maximum height of 60 in. (152 cm) and located in the path of exit. The pull station is the only source of manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station with- in a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull station is 20. One pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is allowed per system. The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull station is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the 150 ft. (45;7 m) maximum must -be observed- butt as pulley: elbows are placed between the AUTOM 4N and the tee, they must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for ► use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 94 for three different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or both must ► be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.) TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE) PULLEY TEE 12 IN. (305 mm) o F-1 0 GAS VALVE OR AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL 149 FT. (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM PER EACH SIDE OF TEE TEE CLOSETO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) 12 IN. 12 IN. (305 mm) (305 mm) PULLEY TEE GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL AUTOMAN 149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND TEE TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 6- PULLEY TEE 6 AUTOMAN GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL FIGURE 94 '04907 Metal Stamped Style — Part No. 4835 or 54011 Part No. Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote manual pull station are: 55601 Description Part No. Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* 54011 Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835 Pulley Elbow 423250 Pulley Elbow 415670 Pulley Tee 427929 *Assembly includes parts listed below: 415670 1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821 Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeves 4596 Glass Break Rod (1) 4834 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS An Ansul or Ansul approved mechanical gas shut-off valve system can be attached.,to .:the _R710Z'system: The' system works .both, - mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder located inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation of the fire suppression system, a pneumatically -operated air cylinder assem- bly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve. The total length of the cable for each mechanical gas valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used is 20 for each valve. One pulley tee (Part No. 427929) is allowed per system. The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the 150 ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deduct- ed from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for ► use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 94 for three different examples. Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut- off Valve are: Description Part No. Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55598 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55601 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55604 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/2 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55607 Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55610 Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25937 Gas Valve/Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25938 Pulley Elbow 423250 Pulley Elbow 415670 Pulley Tee 427929 1/16" Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or 50 ft. (15 m) or 500 ft. (152 m) roll 79653 Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeve 4596 Stop Sleeve (2) 26317 * Assembly includes parts listed below: Air Cylinder Assembly 15733 Air Cylinder 15521 Tubing Assembly 15529 Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525 Male Elbow 15523 Male Connector 15522 Machine Screw (2) 15421 Hex Nut (2) 15527 Lockwasher(2) 4141 Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197 MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be mount- ed in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient operating temperature range of all valves is 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C). The valves are not weatherproof and must be located indoors in areas approved by the "authority having jurisdiction." ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS A UL Listed electrically -operated gas shut-off valve can be attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric gas shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached with both an electric (snap -action) switch and a manual reset relay. For more information on the types of electric (snap -action) switches, refer to the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section. The manual reset relay is reviewed in this section. All electrical connections -should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The following is a brief explanation of how the R-102 system oper- ates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached: With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the nor- mally closed contacts in the snap -action switch allow current to flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized, nor- mally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the solenoid in the gas valve to be energized. Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed contacts in the snap -action switch will open, de -energizing the reset relay. This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will cause the gas valve to become de -energized and close. The system must be re -armed and the "push to reset" button on the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve. It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the sys- tem was not fired. In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power failure has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut-off valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition. For resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Procedures" section in this manual. Approvals Ansul gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult Ansul Incorporated, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542. If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically - operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of appro- priate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz:' The infor- mation on temperature and type of gas that the valves are suitable for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5:' The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that needs to be energized to remain open. Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut-off Valve are: SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 4-53 10-1-02 REV.1 Descriotion Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT* 13707 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT* 13708 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT* 13709 Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT* 13710 Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT* 17643 Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702 'Valves are normally closed when de -energized. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC. Part No. Description 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The electric (snap -action) switches for the R-102 system are spe- cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices, and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See Figures 98 through 100 for reference.) Contractors shall supply "UL listed, enclosed industrial control equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of the cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or 24 VAC/60 Hz.' All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Electric (Snap -Action) Switches that may be field installed are: Part No. Descriotion 423878 One Switch Kit 423879 Two Switch Kit 423880 Three Switch Kit 423881 Four Switch Kit Each switch has a set of single -pole, double throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. NOTE: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load exceeds the rated capacity of the switch. Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so that the actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as well as provide the extinguishing function of the system. If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt audi- ble or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive from alarms or indicators indicating operation or hazardous conditions as specified in NFPA 17A. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-54 REV. 1 10-1-02 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION SWITCH WIRING SCHEMATIC O MANUAL RESET O RELAY JUNCTION BOXES (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) �- ELECTRIC GAS VALVE 000277 WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 --- BLACK ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH RED (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL - AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) _ BROWN I RESET POWER I jINDICATOR I GND 1 �1 I A B SCREWI 5 I L2 NEUTRAL 14 Lt HOT 110 VAC160HZ RELAY COIL 1 6 13 I 9 I I 3 12 I 4 I 7 I1 I 1 i I MANUAL RESET RELAY j ( (PART NO. 426151) 1 1 I ELECTRIC RATING 113 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC GAS VALVE 112 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC SEE NOTE 3 002462 NOTE: 13 Amp, 28 VDC 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. CONTRACTORS: -UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ.' FIGURE 95 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-55 10-1-02 REV.1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load INSTALLATION OVERVIEW WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 r___ BLACK - RE[ ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH BROWN --- (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) r RESET POWER I I 1 INDICATOR I I GNDND I FRED R �ElA B SCRE'N 1 5 1 I 14 I RELAY COIL L2 NEUTRAL I I 110 VAC/60 HZ ( 6 1 3 L1 HOT 1 9 I 3 12 I 4 I 1 7 i 1 1 CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 1 I r -- 1 POWER ON-OFF SWITCH MANUAL RESET RELAY(CUSTOMER I ( 1 (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) '- (PART NO. 426151) I. -- ----'� l _ J I I ELECTRIC RATING TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY 1!3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC ELEMENT LOAD 220V/440V NOTE: 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC L__ _J 1. __ DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 13 Amp, 28 VDC M2480 2. _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. GAS VALVES:'UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY -OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ' OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707, 13708, 13709, 13710, AND 17643. 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 96 FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. POWER SOURCE -�� O MANUAL RESET O RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION SWITCH CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) POWER ON-OFF SWITCH _ I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 000276 WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 r___ BLACK - RE[ ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH BROWN --- (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) r RESET POWER I I 1 INDICATOR I I GNDND I FRED R �ElA B SCRE'N 1 5 1 I 14 I RELAY COIL L2 NEUTRAL I I 110 VAC/60 HZ ( 6 1 3 L1 HOT 1 9 I 3 12 I 4 I 1 7 i 1 1 CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 1 I r -- 1 POWER ON-OFF SWITCH MANUAL RESET RELAY(CUSTOMER I ( 1 (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) '- (PART NO. 426151) I. -- ----'� l _ J I I ELECTRIC RATING TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY 1!3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC ELEMENT LOAD 220V/440V NOTE: 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC L__ _J 1. __ DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 13 Amp, 28 VDC M2480 2. _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. GAS VALVES:'UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY -OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ' OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707, 13708, 13709, 13710, AND 17643. 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 96 FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-56 REV. 1 10-1-02 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE —► O MANUAL RESET O RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION SWITCH OR SWITCH THERMOSTAT --► A (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) U JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) WIRING SCHEMATIC fR4YJ41 WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 r-- BLACK _ RED ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH BROWN (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL ---- AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) I RESET POWER INDICATOR j I I 'ND � I RED -� ) SCR_ 5 1 A B L2 NEUTRAL 14 110 VAC160HZ 1 FIE—AY'_c,OI L1 HOT I 6 13 9 1 —. I 3 12 I 4 I 7 CONTACTOR SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) I I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) r MANUAL RESET RELAY 1 1 ( (PART NO. 426151) XLL ELECTRIC RATING1/',3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC1HP, 10 Amp. 240 VAC TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY 133 Amp, 26 VDC ELEMENT LOAD220V/440V 002461 NOTE: 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. CONTRACTORS:'UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ' ► 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 97 FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS. ETC. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS The installation information listed in this section deals with the lim- itations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi- viduals responsible for the installation of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping, and Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch should be completed. MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS For successful system performance, the regulated release assem- bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-enclosure(s) or tank -bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where the air temperature will not fall below 32 °F (0 "C) or exceed 130 °F (54 °C). Also, the components must be arranged to con- form to the actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution piping guidelines noted in "System Design." Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release assembly or OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regu- lator in this assembly is specifically designed to allow a regulated flow of expellant gas into the agent tank(s). Absence of this regulator could cause the tank(s) to rup- ture or create an improper system discharge. Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release Assembly, and each -regulated actuator assembly required by completing the following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3. a. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The mounting locations must allow the regulated release assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to be within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas line lengths and must be able to support the weight of the assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is mounted inside a cabinet, clearances shall be provided for unrestricted movement of the release assembly compo- nents within the closed cabinet. b. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank from enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the tank/adaptor assembly. c. Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depending on the mounting surface. d. When mounting a 6 -gallon manifolded system (or a 6 -gal- lon individual piped system) it is critical that each mounting box is located as shown in Figure 3a. There must be a 5/16 in. space between each box. Less than 5/16 in. will cause interference with the covers, and more than a 5/16 in. will cause a gap between the two hose grommets which will expose the hose to possible tampering or damage. Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the ANSUL AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. knockout in the right side of the tank -enclosure box. Install grommets in each (use Ansul hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511). Remove 1/4 in. plug from backside of R-102 regular and install fixed end of secondary expellant gas hose (included in hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511) in 1/4 in. reg- ulator outlet and wrench tighten. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-1 8-1-01 REV.4 If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface using appropriate fasteners. Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on Page 5-3. Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten into 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tank/enclosure assembly. Also install hose to tank adaptor in regulated release and wrench tighten. See Figure 74b. in "Design Section" for details of hose routing. REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 1 000287 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY \ 16 1/2 IN. (42 cm) 13 13/16 IN. (35 cm) 1 318 1N. O O (3.5I cm) 23 1/2 IN. (59.7 cm) 19 7/16 IN. �\ I (49.3 cm) FIGURE 2 000289 7 112 IN. (19 cm) FIGURE 2 000289 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) ► 3.0 GALLON TANK BRACKET 3 112 IN. OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9 cm)� 71N. ,►IR6IN. (15 cm) , (18 cm) 1.0 p O 9 314 IN.��� O (25 cm) 38 • 5.38 IN. • (13.7 cm) Q 18.5 IN. o (47 cm) • 15 IN. (38 cm) � (20 cm) 62 (1.5 cm) .62 (1.5 cm) ► SINGLETANK ENCLOSURE 5.75 IN. (14.6 cm) FIGURE 3 000707 / • MULTIPLE TANK ASSEMBLY 6 5/16 IN. (16 cm) 13 13/16 IN. LOCATION OF ~-(35 cm) GROMMETS +-- t ' 19 7/16 IN. I 19 7/16 IN. (49 cm) I I (49 cm) • X- D. not install cartridge at this time or system maybe a tuate 2. Mount each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly by com- pleting the following steps: a. Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the enclosure or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller than the bracket. Allow sufficient space for convenient piping and removal.) b. Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure enclo- sure or bracket to the mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depend- ing on the mounting surface. ► 101 REMOTE RELEASE 8 5/8 IN. (22 cm) 000499 .. 9 IN . 'w__ (22.9 cm) 8 5/16 IN. (16 cm) 23 1/2 IN. (59.7 cm) / 7 1/2 IN. (19.1 cm) 000290 FIGURE 4 5 13116 IN. (14.9 cm) 9 3/8 IN. (23.8 cm) y 7 1/8 IN. (18.1 cm) 8 1/2 IN. (47 cm) 21 1/2 IN. (54.6 cm) FIGURE 4a 000464 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) 3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps: a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill opening. Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine bursting disc is in place and that silver side is away from tank. See Figure 5. FIGURE 5 000291 Safety glasses should be worn during transfer opera- tions of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation per- sists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and contact a physician immediately. Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH ► Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 6 for detailed filling ► tolerances. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See Figure 6. ► During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent entering gas hoses and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. i SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 5-2.1 10-1-02 REV.4 ALL STAINLESS STEEL TANKS 000292 RED PAINTED STEEL TANK 2 1/4 IN. t 1/8 IN. (57 mm t 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OFTHE COLLAR FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK OR 1 3/4 IN. 3 1/8 IN. (45 mm t 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK 1 IN. TO 1 1/8 IN. (25-29 mm) FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE FILL OPENING _ FOR BOTH 3.0 GALLON AND 1.5 GALLON TANKS 000292. FIGURE 6 000292 c. Reinstall adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening until metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom of adap- tor and tank collar. 4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2.2 REV. 1 7-1-98 NOTES: Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 9 ® 9 A 000293 Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver aooz9a Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver TO REGULATED ACTUATOR TO TANK IN (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN BRACKET TO REGULATED BRACKET OR OR ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR PIPE (OR HOSE WHEN ENCLOSURE TO ENCLOSURE ONLY) (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO PRESSURE 2 IN. NIPPLE SWITCH REQUIRED D 0 p \ 000296 V..TON REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS SINGLE TANK WITH DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE PRESSURE SWITCH TANKS WITH PRESSURE CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, HOT -TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME -PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL. FIGURE 7 0 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-3 7-1-98 REV.2 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE NOTICE Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the piping Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe open - design must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, ing, as this could cause possible blockage of each regulated actuator assembly and each tank -bracket assem- the gas pressure. bly should be securely mounted. Thread sealant or compound must not be used. General Piping Requirements 4. When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping, install 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassembly later. nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends Actuation Gas Line are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through 3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the fol - tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male lowing steps: thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise 1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet. Install around the threads, away from the pipe opening. the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attachment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required to connect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7. Typical Arrangements For A One Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver 9 ® 9 A 000293 Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver aooz9a Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To Cartridge Receiver TO REGULATED ACTUATOR TO TANK IN (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN BRACKET TO REGULATED BRACKET OR OR ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR PIPE (OR HOSE WHEN ENCLOSURE TO ENCLOSURE ONLY) (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO PRESSURE 2 IN. NIPPLE SWITCH REQUIRED D 0 p \ 000296 V..TON REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS SINGLE TANK WITH DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE PRESSURE SWITCH TANKS WITH PRESSURE CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, HOT -TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME -PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL. FIGURE 7 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line (Continued) 2. Run piping up through the regulated release assembly enclo- sure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated actuator assembly used within the system. 3. The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem- blies must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT -20-R nitro- gen cartridge, an LT -30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101-10 CO2 ► cartridge, or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 8. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT -20-R, LT -30-R, 101-20 OR 101.30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 20 FT. (6 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ANSULAUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A "DOUBLE -TANK" OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED RELEASE Qjj ASSEMBLY ANSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 4. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 9. 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS FIGURE 8 000778 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY FIGURE 9 000298 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly reg- ulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps: 1. The regulated release assembly is shipped with a factory - installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one at the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet connects the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with a 1/4 in. plug. 2. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted inside the enclosure. If a pressure switch is required, a 1/4 in. x 1/8 in. reducing fitting will be required for connection between the back regulator outlet and the pressure switch. See Figure 7. DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANK SYSTEMS: If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is being installed, the plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See Figure 6 for proper connections to the regulator.) 3. Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back out- let through one of the knockouts provided in the enclosure. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 10. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 10 000778 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-5 10-1-02 REV.4 4. If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total combined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when ► using a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 car - 0. tridge. See Figure 9. 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90' elbow. Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator Assembly Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the following steps: 1. The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory -installed reg- ulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 135° from each other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the other con- tains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank which will be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank that is mounted inside the enclosure. 2. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator through the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly. A maximum of one tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is allowed per regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu- lated actuator to the tank -bracket assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 11. 3. A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90' elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow: EXPELI MAXIMI MAXIMI FIGURE 11 000777 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-6 REV. 2 10-1-02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line From 101 Remote Release(s) to Regulated Actuators Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the reg- ulated actuators by completing the following: 1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed 100 ft. ► (30.5). See Figure 12. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings ► can be used. See Component Section for detailed information. 2. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in -the actuation piping. Two 45° 'elbows equal one 90°'elbow. See - Figure 12. 3. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in the actuation piping. See Figure 12. SAFETY RELIEF 9 TEES VALVE MAXIMUM 114 IN. ACTUATION LINE - 100 FT. (30.5 m) MAXIMUM EXPELLANT GAS LINE I I ❑ I ❑ I ❑ I ❑ f I 1 I I I I I I I I L [P 'D C'� C is REGULATED ACTUATOR AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR WITH TANK (TYR) AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TYR) 20 ELBOWS MAXIMUM IIIVI II�VI ❑ Lei I I I I I 1 REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS (5 MAXIMUM) FIGURE 12 000301 INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel- lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actuator, and each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly should already be installed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and hazard areas to be covered. General Piping Requirements 1. Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTICE Do not use hot -dipped galvanized iron pipe or fittings in the agent distribution piping. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. 3. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening as the pipe and nozzles could become plugged. Thread sealant or compound must not be used as it could plug the nozzles. 4. Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent tanks may be manifolded together and run to the predeter- mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the same cartridge may be manifolded. NOTICE Closely follow the piping requirements for each size system, as detailed in the "System Design" section, when installing distribution piping. ►Pipe Hanger Recommended Guidelines 1. Space hangers as follows: Maximum Recommended Pipe Size_ Distance Between Hangers 3/8 in. 5 ft. (12.7 cm) 2. Hangers should be placed between elbows when the distance is greater than 2 ft. (0.6 m). Piping Installation 1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on the tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to conform to the distribution piping. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-7 10-1-02 REV.3 2. Based on the piping sketch developed in the "System Design" section of this manual, install the supply line and position the tees at points where .branch lines must be installed. See Figure 13. FIGURE 13 000302 3. Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each noz- zle. (Make certain all fittings are tight and all piping is secure- ly bracketed.) The 1 WS and 1 NS nozzles can be aimed by slipping a 3/8 in. Schedule 40 pipe over the tip, moving the tip to the correct aiming point, and then wrench tightening the retaining ring. - 4. All threaded connections located in the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. 5. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the ► exterior of the blow -off cap. DO NOT FILL CAP WITH ► GREASE. NOTICE When using a metal blow -off cap, make certain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal cap. P. 6. When a nozzle utilizes a metal blow -off cap, the nozzle tip must be coated with Silicone 111 grease before the cap is installed. The grease must be wiped across the tip and around the tip so that a rim of grease will be seen once the nozzle cap is in place. also, apply grease to the outside of the cap includ- ing application of the grease between the cap clips and the cap. ► 7. Make certain a blow -off cap is in place over each nozzle tip. These blow -off caps are designed to keep grease from build- ing -up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent Flow. See Figure 14. 000303 000304 000305 FIGURE 14 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-8 REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection design must already be completed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except for the number of hazard areas to be covered. NOTICE Inform customer that fusible links should not be exposed to ammonia -based chemical cleaners or steam. 1. Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design" sec- tion, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations. 2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for mounting the detectors. NOTE: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make cer- tain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. i When changing the direction of conduit, use only Ansul pulley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release, it is accept- able to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly" (Part No. 79825). Ansul offers three styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part No. 56837 and 56838 are the 'blip -on" style series and termi- nal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a "clip -on" style linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which requires the wire rope to be threaded through each linkage assembly while the rope is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 417368 and 417369 are the "scissor" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which does not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 15. COMPRESSION -� FITTING NUT 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 15 000308 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 16. i FIGURE 16 00030, 3. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 17. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 17 000309 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 4. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid inter- ference. 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. FIGURE 18 000310 FIGURE 19 000311 2-3 IN. �(5-8 cm) FIGURE 20 0003,2 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747' Page 5-9 7-1-98 REV.1 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 7. Starting at the terminal detector, place the small tab of the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 21. FIGURE 21 000313 8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22. FIGURE 22 00031a SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-10 REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on the opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23. 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket. See Figure 26.,(For optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in the down position.) FIGURE 23 000315 NOTICE The hook portions of the detector linkage should now face away from each other. 10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upside down, with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See Figure 24. FIGURE 24 W0316 11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. See Figure 25. FIGURE 25 000317 BRACKET FIGURE 26 000318 NOTICE When positioning the linkage in the bracket, it is recommended to locate the linkage slightly off center, toward the terminal detector side. 13. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. 14. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the regu- lated release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release mech- anism. See Figure 27. COCK KING PIN FIGURE 27 000319 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the "UP" position. See Figure 28. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 5-11 7-1-98 REV.1 17. Make certain tension lever is in the ."UP" position. See Figure 30. TENSION LEVER IN'UP' POSITION FIGURE 30 000322 18. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, ® is in the detector bracket, located slightly toward the terminal detector side. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip FIGURE 28 hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only 000320 the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- 16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on tion in each detector, including terminal detec- left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform - stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. ing Steps 19 and 20. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor 19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking removed.) See Figure 29. clamp. aR tLY INSTALLED FIGURE 29 000321 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-12 REV 3 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 20. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is ► a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 31. (If ► clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20.) T A b. l IN. MINIMUM 4 MO., , 3 in. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 31 000323 Do not install cartridge at this time as an !!aj ation could cause system discharge. 21. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. 22. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector brack- et or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 32. COMPRESSION -► FITTING NUT 1/2 IN. STEEL / COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 32 000308 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 33. ► oozasa FIGURE 33 3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 34. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 34 000309 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interfer- ence. 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 35 or as shown in Figure 36 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 37. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. FIGURE 35 000310 FIGURE 36 000311 �23 IN , N. (5-8 cm) FIGURE 37 000312 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 5-13 7-1-98 REV.1 NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 7. Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 38. Note that the ANSUL AUTOMAN release is located on the left side of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp the two assembly "boot - hooks" over the cable with pliers so the cable is captured under each hook but the whole assembly can move from side to side. Center the assembly in the detector bracket. "ANSUL AUTONIAN' M � u ou FIGURE 38 000503 8. Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release side of the hook assembly, then pull the fusible link to the opposite side and complete the hookup as shown in Figures 39 and 40. The top of the hook assembly must be inside the bracket stiff- eners. The hook assembly with the fusible link in place must be located toward the terminal detector side of the bracket. FIGURE 39 00050. FIGURE 40 000324 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-14 REV.2 8-1-01 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 9. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. Make certain all detector linkages are positioned against either the front or back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure 40a. I IN FIGURE 40a 00"29 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism. See Figure 41. COCK' FIGURE 42 000320 12. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclo- sure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 43. K 8AR IPERLY INSTALLED <ING PIN FIGURE 43 000321 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 44. FIGURE 41 000319 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 42. TENSION LEVER IN *UP. POSITION FIGURE 44 000322 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the terminal detector side. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform- ing Steps 15 and 16. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking clamp. 16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 45. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) 3 IN. MINIMUM 4 mm) i in. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 45 000373 a Qi'CAT�IO. NAk .i i-4. 17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Service Section, Page 7-1 — 7-3, of this manual. 18. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 in. steel compression fittings. Thread the compression fitting into the detector bracket and then secure by using the lock nut sup- plied with the fitting. See Figure 46. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 5-15 8-1-01 REV.2 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTINGS 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION -► FITTING NUT FIGURE 46 000330 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as zinc will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed wire rope up through hole in regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 47. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 47 000309 3. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and to the first detector. 4. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, feed the wire rope through the detector linkage assembly. See Figure 48. 5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage assembly at each additional bracket. 6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. (5-8 cm) of wire rope to extend beyond the clamping device and wrench tighten the set screws. See Figure 48. 2-3 IN. (5-8 cm) O FIGURE 48 000332 7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during positioning of the detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-16 REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage togeth- er and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over -both detector hooks. For optimum detection, make cer- tain the solder joint i5'inthe down'position: Locate the linkage in the center of the detector bracket. See Figure 49. FIGURE 49 000333 9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul approved fusible links on the detector hooks and position the linkage in the cen- ter of each bracket. 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of regulated release mechanism with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring housing, with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release. See Figure 50. cc (ING PIN FIGURE 50 000319 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the cock- ing pin until trip hammer indented surface moves underneath the pin. See Figure 51. FIGURE 51 000320 12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into the locking position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actu- ated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 52. R LY INSTALLED FIGURE 52 00032, INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 53. TENSION LEVER IN "UP' POSITION FIGURE 53 000322 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for the installation in each detector, including the termi- nal detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 15 and 16. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking clamp. 16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a ► minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5mm) clearance between the base of trip hammer assem- bly and cable lever assembly. See Figure 54. (If clearance is ► not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) 0. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 " Page 5-17 7-1-98 REV.1 IN. MINIMUM I mm) in. MAXIMUM i mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 54 000323 im CAUTION 1= 17. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. 18. When all testing has been completed in the "Testing and Placing in Service" section, cut off excess wire rope in the reg- ulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-18 REV. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION To install a remote manual pull station complete the following steps: 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release assembly is in the cocked position. If regulated release assembly does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. 3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull sta- tion within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per each manual pull station is 20 of Part No. 423250 or 415670. A maximum of two (2) manual pull stations can be connected to each AUTOMAN Release. 4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. See Figure 54a. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected loca- ► tion so that printing is right side up and readable. WALL COMPRESSION PULLEY CONNECTOR ELBOW O o SHORT PIECE /BELL OF CONDUIT REDUCING PULL I COUPLING STATION (MOUNT TO WALL) FIGURE 54a 002485 5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to regulated release assembly as necessary. See Figure 55 or 56. See Figure 56a for optional methods of installing wire rope when utilizing a pulley tee, Part No. 427929. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION PULLEY ELBOW WIRE ROPE AB L SLEEVE (CABLE LEVER RELEASE MECHANISM REMOTE Vl MANUAL PULL STATION BREAK ROD LOCK BAR PULL SIDE STUD..•. - .. JUNCTION BOX (NOT RING HANDLE SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) FIGURE 55 00,090 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION ED PULLEY TEE PULLEY ELBOW /OVAL f SLEEVE RELEASE i MECHANISM CABLE ' LEVER LOCK NLS BAR t JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) JJ �/ 000305 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 008527 !E CAN :D IN PION RELEASE MECHANISM FIGURE 56 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued) PULLEY TEE, PART NO. 427929 ONLY NO ELBOWS ALLOWED IN THIS AREA OVAL SLEEVE, PART NO. 4596 CONNECT TO AIR CYLINDER FOR GAS VALVES AND CONNECT TO RELEASE °0'1909 TRIP LEVER FOR PULL STATIONS CONTINUOUS WIRE ROPE MINIMUM OF OVAL SLEEVE, 6 IN. (152 n, I I PART N0.4596 (2) OVAL SLEEVES, PART NO. 4596 MINIMUM OF NO ELBOWS ALLOWED CONNECT TO 6 IN.(152 mm WHERE TWO WIRE ) ~ ROPES ARE PRESENT AIR CYLINDER FOR GAS SPLICED WIREL� CONTINUOUS WIRE VALVES AND ROPE ROPE CONNECTTO RELEASE TRIP `-'-- LEVER FOR PULLEY TEE, PART PULL NO. 427929 ONLY i ', STATIONS NOTE: EITHER BOTH MUST BE GAS VALVES OR BOTH MUST BE PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS NOT ALLOWED. 006910 FIGURE 56a 6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at regulated release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 6 in. (152 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used). 8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through cable lever guide holes and back through the oval crimp sleeve. See Figure 55. 9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 55. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 - Page 5-19 10-1-02 REV.4 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE NOTICE Mechanical gas valves are designed for indoor installation only. To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the fol- lowing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.) NOTE: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed in reg- ulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator assemblies. Installation in either is the same. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the regulated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 57. CARTRIDGE RECEIVER PLUG FIGURE 57 000339 4. Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble with screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See Figure 58. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted posi- tion, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s) in the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 59. FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE WIRE ROPE-- 1 / STOP SLEEVE MOUNTING BRACKET AIR CYLINDER-► ROD _ ot - Ti JJ I 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS FIGURE 58 000340 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-20 REV.2 8-1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) TOP KNOCKOUTS o �- MECHANICAL GAS VALVE AIR CYLINDER BOTTOM KNOCKOUTS •102 REGULATED ELEASE FIGURE 59 00034, ►NOTE: Two air cylinders are'necessary only if'the old style pulley tee, Part No. 15342, is utilized. If new style pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is utilized, only one air cylinder is required. Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas valve to a sin- gle air cylinder. See Figure 60. 5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system, locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in.(.6 cm) holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble second cylinder with screws, lockwashers, and nuts as required. Wrench tighten. See Figure 60. WIRE ROPE STOP SLEEVES (SYSTEMS USING AIR CYLINDER PULLEYTEE, RODS PART NO. 15342) r, i MOUNTING BRACKETS 000342 118 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS (SYSTEMS USING / \ PULLEY TEE, PART NO. STOP 427929) SLEEVES NOTE: NO ELBOWS (2) ARE ALLOWED / BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND PULLEY TEE N. 004855 FIGURE 60 000342 b. 0. INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) 6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on the reg- ulated release mechanism. See Figures 58 and 60. NOTICE Do not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form a bend too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting without over tightening. Over tightening could result in pressure leakage or line separation at actuation. 7. ® 0 To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appliances being protected upon actuation of the system. Mechanical gas valves may be mounted in any convenient horizontal or verti- cal position. See Figure 61. a. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal chips. b. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve cast- ing, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe tape, paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care should be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant to male threads only. . c. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 61. d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. f. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). g. The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each gas valve is 20. 0. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 * Page 5-21 8-1-01 REV.2 ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000343 - CORRECT WAY: 0 WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE ° BEING INSERTED PREVENTS WRONG WAY: EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY o WRENCH APPLIED \ / AT THIS POINT r STRAINS VALVE BODY. 000344 ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000346 'WAY: APPLIED NEXT IEWG INSERTED S EXCESS N VALVE BODY. WRONG WAY: WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY. FIGURE 61 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-22 REV 2 8-1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) 8. Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechanical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as neces- sary. 9. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod. See Figure 58. 10. Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley elbow. Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 11. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress. Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make cer- tain crimp is on top of cocking lever, with wire rope curled under lever. See Figure 62. �E ROPE COCKING LEVER FIGURE 62 W0347 12. With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in air cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire rope and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. See Figure 58. 1,13. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 63. ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION FIGURE 63 14. Raise air cylinder rod "UP" to its maximum extended position. See Figure 58. 15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack. NOTICE DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder rod extended "UP" to its maximum extension before completing next step. 1& Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See Figure 58. 17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm) from end of stop sleeve. 18. NOTE: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate a single mechanical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN releases, see Figure 64 for installation instructions. Maximum length of wire rope to each ANSUL AUTOMAN release must not exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m) and maxi- mum number of elbows must not exceed 20. TO'ANSUL AUTOMAN' TO'ANSUL AUTOMAN* RELEASE NO. 1 RELEASE NO. 2 6 IN. (152 mm) MINIMUM I t NO PUL No PUL _r'LEY ELBOWS FROM CRIMF 1E ALLOWED WHERE TWO TO PULLEY I WIREWROPES ARE PRESENT 2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM USE (2) TWO FROM CRIMP SLEEVE OVAL SLEEVES, To COMPRESSION PART NO. 4596 FITTING FIGURE 64 001091 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES NOTICE Electric gas valves are designed for indoor installation only. The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 3. _ o 7certain e the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make hat the gas lineis turned off before connecting the e. Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appli- ances being protected upon actuation of the system. Refer to ► manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure 65. a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips. b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal pipe line with no more than a five degree (5°) lean either way. c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-23 8-1-01 REV.3 CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. CORRECT WA WRENCH APF BEING INSER" EXCESS STRi 00,092 FAY: APPLIED AT T STRAINS 7Y. FIGURE 65 4. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas valve to manual reset relay enclosure. 5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in "Design" sec- tion for typical wiring diagrams. 6. Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main power could cause personal injury or death if contact is made with energized wires. Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer to manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for assis- tance. 7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure. If snap -action switches have not been attached, go to "Electric Switch" section and install them at this time by completing Steps 3 through 8. 9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap -action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. 10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap -action) switch to manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's instruc- tions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance. 11. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 12. Properly return electrical power to the system. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-24 REV. 3 10-1-02 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The procedure for field installing an electric (snap -action) switch is b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the as follows: lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. CAUTION 01 Unused wire leads will become "hot" when the system is oper- ated. Failure to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will C. cause electric shock if touched. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the regulat- ed release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from reg 'fated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole- noid, it will also have a factory installed switch. 3. Press each wire assembly onto the 3 -terminals located on the switch(s). Be sure that the connector is pressed tight against the switch. See Figure 66. BLACK SNAP-ACTION r� SWITCH 1 COMMON RED LR!OIW!N rt LACK N.O. N. C... -z BROWN \ PRESS CONNECTOR R TIGHTLY AGAINST SWITCH \ NOTE: SWITCH SHOWN IN NORMAL POSITION ACTUATING ARM FIGURE 66 001621 4. Install switch(s) to the mounting bracket using provided fas- teners and tighten securely. 5. if more than one switch is being installed, it is necessary to attach the trip lever extension stud to the trip lever. See Figure 67. Using the provided fasteners, securely install the extension stud. 6. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface of the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actuated, to force the actuating arm "UP," thus reversing the normal condi- tion of the switch. See Figure 67. For multiple switch installations, make certain switch actuating arms are positioned on trip lever extension stud. Before proceeding with Step 7, test electric (snap -action) switches: a. Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is working properly there should be an audible click. When installing multiple switches, make certain all switch- es transfer when the release operates. If they do not, read- just their position. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. After adjustments repeat steps a and, b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar. ACTUATING ARM GRI MOUNTING HOLE FOR TRIP LEVER EXTENSION ®- TRIP LEVER EXTENSION STUD 002298 001624 FIGURE 67 8. The switch may now be connected to compatible components that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer to manu- facturer's instructions (if provided) for proper wiring connec- tions to compatible components. 9. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. NOTICE Do not connect power source to any relay, con- tactor, or contractor supplied devices until all other electrical connections are made. Refer to proper section or manufacturer supplied instruc- tions for recommended installation procedures for these devices. 10. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay, contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 5-25 10-1-02 REV.3 WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on wiring the 24 VDC regulated release assembly. Notes: 1. To be connected to a nominal 12 VDC or 24 VDC releasing cir-' cuit. Input power: 450 mA at 12 VDC or 750 mA at 24 VDC. Solenoid on time: Approximately 50 milliseconds. 2. Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative. 3. All interconnecting wiring must be 18 AWG minimum. 4. St contact rating: 15A, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC resistive; 1/2A, 125 VDC; 1/4A, 250 VDC; 5A, 120 VAC inductive. 5. SOL, coil resistance:.28 OHMS +/- 10% at 77 °F (25 °C). 6. Install the in-line supervisory device SD, across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation instruc- tions for supervisory device requirements. If an in-line super- visory device is not required, install jumper J2 across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON A ACTUATION OF RELEASE /1 I HIGH ` J 7 I ACCESSORY POWER re, SOURCE *� 2 S1 I NC LOW I I I, a---- s S i UL LISTED + OR DX 2 SUPERVISED NC RELEASING 80- - - " 6 I CONTROL UNIT (-) �J IN-LINE SUPERVISORY / DEVICE TZ, 1 c—) 8 / SOLS VOLTAGE I TRANSIENT ' SUPPRESSOR L - �_ J AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES. SEE S, RATINGS " FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S, RATINGS. FIGURE 68 _.J SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-26 REV. 3 10-1-02 NOTES: After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at the regulated release assembly. TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following steps: 1. With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar from regulated release assembly cable lever. 2. On metal stamped pull station, remove glass break rod from pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide glass break rod out. On molded plastic pull station, seal will be broken during test and must be replaced. 3. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release assem- bly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station is properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does not trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not cor- rect the problem, there is too much slack in the line and it must be retightened. 4. Cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above oval sleeve. 5. Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985) 6. On metal stamped pull station, slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. On molded plastic pull station, replace seal. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed -to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the following steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. 2. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full "DOWN" position. The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this does not correct the problem there may be too much slack in the line and it should be retightened. 3. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain no other gas leaks exist. 4. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. 5. Recock mechanical gas valve. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747. Page 6-1 7-1-98 REV 1 6. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 7. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. 8. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot. Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on Ansul type valves. See Figure 1. 'ECTION NO. 197) FIGURE 1 000359 9. Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked with lock bar in place. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-2 REV. 1 7-1-98 TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. 2. Make certain electric (snap -action) switch is properly wired. 3. Make certain all other devices connected to the manual reset relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring diagrams in Figures 80, 81, and 82 in "Design" section. 4. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no other gas leaks exist. 5. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON) to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve. 6. Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism. Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 7. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED LIGHT OUT) will de -energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn power source off. Then re-examine all wiring connections for proper hookup. Refer to Figures 80, 81, and 82 in "Design" section for typical wiring diagram. 8. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). 9. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 10. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap -Action) Switch is as follows: NOTICE If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached to system, perform proper test procedure for the gas valve first, before completing the following steps. 1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical devices should be operating at this time. 2. Remove lock bar. • Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 3. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset relay will de -energize the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas line.) All electrically -operated devices predetermined to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does not occur, turn power source off and make sure all wiring is properly connected and retest. Refer to Figures 84, 85, and 86 in "Design" section for typical wiring diagram. 4. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay is installed, depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be necessary to re -light any pilot lights on the cooking appliances. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page 6-4, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 1. Test detection system by completing the following steps: a. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 2. (:0 0 TEST LINK ' FIGURE 2 000383 C. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. d. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to "DOWN" position and remove lock bar. e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4. 2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check the following components and remedy any disorder as follows: a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and cen- tered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow. d. Make certain that lock bar is removed. e. Make certain that regulated release mechanism is cocked. f. Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN" position. 3. Re -test the system by completing the following steps: a. Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar is inserted. b. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. c. Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on the terminal detector. d. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "DOWN" position. e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maxi- mum clearance between the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. f. Remove the lock bar. g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-3 10-1-02 REV.2 4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the follow- ing steps: a. Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a properly - rated fusible link in the terminal detector. b. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). c. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. d. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. NOTICE Reset any electrical equipment that may have been affected by the system actuation. f. Install appropriate cartridge into the regulated release mechanism receiver and each regulated actuator receiver. Hand tighten firmly. g. Remove the lock bar. h. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each reg- ulated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fas- teners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is install in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-4 REV. 2 10-1-02 ' NOTES: "The recharge information listed in this section deals with the limi- tations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi- viduals responsible for the recharge of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training ► program. For continued fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire sup- pression system must be recharged immediately after use. Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple -tank sys- tems are as follows. CLEANUP PROCEDURES Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX or ANSULEX Low pH agents, due to the alkaline nature of these agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24 hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemical agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi-product that can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following procedures should be followed: Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut off. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electrical controls have been de -energized to avoid any chance of elec- trical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from electri- cally conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue. Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to room temperature. Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming and/or spattering. 1. The agent is non-toxic; however, food product and cooking grease/oil that has come in contact with the agent will no longer be suitable for human consumption and should be dis- carded. 2. Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local san- itary land fill site in accordance to local authorities. NOTE: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. 3. `Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge, wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all surfaces that have come in contact with the agent. Note: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. 4. After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately rinse and allow to completely dry before re -energizing the equipment. SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-1 7-1-98 REV.1 RECHARGE NOTICE Determine the cause of system discharge and correct immediately before perfiorming system recharge. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure: Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line(s). 3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each.tank adaptor out- let line(s). 4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. 5. Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly and complete the following: a. Remove O-ring and inspect for damage. b. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme tem- perature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove. See Figure 1. c. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug. d. Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion. Replace if necessary. e. Reinstall vent plug into adaptor body. Jl/ FIGURE 1 000964 6. Do not flush pipe with only water or other non -approved material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to possible improper discharge. Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical residue. To prepare the system for flushing: a. Pour the complete contents of one 32 -oz. bottle of Ansul Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon. b. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water. Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm water to bring the fill level to within approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill opening. SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-2 REV. 4 10-1-02 RECHARGE (Continued) c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten. d. At expellant gas line inlet to adaptor/tube assembly, install a 1/4 in. male quick connect adaptor. e. Connect nitrogen cylinder outlet hose to the male quick connect adaptor using the female portion of the adaptor assembly. 7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure 3. If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9. If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8. NOZZ FITTIP HEAVY GAUGE PLASTIC BAG VENT HOLES FIGURE 2 001739 NOZZLE TIP AND RETAINER NOZZLE BODY HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC TUBING 1/2 IN. NPT COMPRESSION FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR FIGURE 3 001700 8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) O.D. plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed .062 in. (1.6 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of at least 90 PSI (620.6 kPa) expelled during the flushing and blowdown procedures. Also required is a container with some means of securing tub- ing to it such as a five -gallon plastic pail and cover that snaps onto the pail. To prepare the plastic tubing: a. Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them long enough to reach the container from each nozzle outlet. b. Using a 1 N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930), slide a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the rib on the nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) adjustable hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip will be connected to the nozzle body left installed in the distribution piping. c. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional hole that can be used for venting. d. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to the pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 4. 1 N NOZZLE TIP RIB ON NOZZLE AND RETAINER �— (PART NO. 56930) 1/2 IN. TUBING 1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP \ 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION TUBING g INSERT n /j ADAPTOR G/THREADED ADAPTOR 1/2 IN. CONDUIT�� PAIL - NUTS COVER FIGURE 4 0003 e. Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. Tubing inserts will be required. See Figure 4. f. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge piping. g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail. 9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure: a. Connect discharge piping to agent tank adaptor. b. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert lock bar. ► c. Install LT -30-R Cartridge; hand tighten. d. Remove lock bar. e. If regulated actuators are included in the system, also install LT -30-R cartridges in them. f. Actuate system via pull station. g. Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm soapy water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers to their appropriate locations in the discharge piping. h. Remove empty tank. RECHARGE (Continued) E's 10. Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering ► the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling instructions. . During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. 11. Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, in adaptor assembly. Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank. 12. Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place. Return and secure each tank in regulated release assembly and mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas and dis- tribution piping as required. 13. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. 14. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). 15. Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly as required. 0 Do not install replacement cartridge!thisme or system may be actuated. 16. Install properly -rated fusible links in all detectors except the terminal detector. NOTICE If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all fusible links must be replaced. 17. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. 18. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. 19. Remove the lock bar. 20. Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the "Testing Detection System" portion of the "Testing and Placing In Service" section, Page 6-4, of this manual. 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" posi- tion. 22. Install properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link in terminal detector. 23. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). 24. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket. 25. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND, RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-3 10-1-02 REV.3 26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. NOTICE If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8- 1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 25 and 26. 27. Remove lock bar. 28. Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operating the remote manual pull station. 29. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. ` 30. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua- tion. Refer to "Resetting" section, Page 7-3 and 7-4. RESETTING Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station Metal Stamped Style Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the following steps: 1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break glass rod. 2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass from station. 3. Press and position ring handle in proper location against cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No. 4834) through stud and handle. 4. Tighten set screw into stud. 5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Molded Plastic Style 1. Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover. 2. Insert break -away seal, Part No. 79029, through holes in cover and snap in place. SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-4 REV.2 7-1-98 RESETTING (Continued) Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut -Off Valve Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the fol- lowing steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. 1. Remove side cover from gas valve housing. 2. Extend air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Air cylinder is located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure. 3. Recock gas valve by pulling valve `stem up` so' pin in' stem engages in cocking lever. 4. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN" POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any fur- ther. 5. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. 6. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On Ansul type valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal (Part No. 197). 7. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replacement;' Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap -Action) Reset the electric (snap -action) switch by completing the following steps: 1. Make certain the power source is on. 2. Electric (snap -action) switch is reset automatically when the regulated release mechanism is recocked. 3. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page'7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Electrical Gas Shut -Off Valve Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the following steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. 1. Make certain the power source is on. 2. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on). Gas valve will resume its normal operating (open) position. 3. Check burners'- for gaseous odor. IF' GASEOUS ODOR' EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 4. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. 5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Pressure Switch Reset the pressure switch by completing the following: 1. Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover. The pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right side of the regulated release enclosure. An audible click will be heard to verify the pressure switch has resumed its normal (non - actuated) condition. 2. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE To complete the recharge and resetting procedures: 1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 2. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into the regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator receiver and hand tighten. 3. Remove lock bar. 4. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and lower cover hole and secure. 5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a per- manent file. The maintenance information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval, along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be' hydro -tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested. SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and mul- tiple -tank systems are as follows. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render the fire sup- pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized Ansul distributor immediately following any such cleaning operations. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 1. .K BAR )PERLY rALLED FIGURE 1 000321 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). 5. From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line. 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-1 10-1-02 REV.6 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. 8. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See Figure 2. FIGURE 2 000291 9. Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 3. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling tolerances. 10. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. See Figure 3. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for free move- ment and corrosion (replace if necessary). Reinstall vent plug. Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube assembly to each tank. Tighten securely. SILVER SIDE OF DISC AWAY FROM TANK O-RING FIGURE 3 OW3, 11. Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and secure. 12. Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and agent distribution piping. 13. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. NOTICE Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-2 REV. 2 10-1-02 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 14. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps. 15. Remove the lock bar and manually test the regulated release assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. Check pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace cover if cable has worn a groove in the cover as deep as the diameter of the cable. 16. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever ► (Part No. 14995). See Figure 4. Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap -action) switches: a. With the.ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready posi- tion, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is work- ing -properly, there should be an audible click. b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. d. After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar. b. FIGURE 4 000720 ► 17. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 5. TENSION LEVER IN 'UP" POSITION FIGURE 5 000022 18. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. ' 19. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 6. TENSION LEVER IN "DOWN' POSITION ' FIGURE 6 00,098 20. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6, Page 6-3. 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" posi- tion. 22. Clean and return properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for one year or more must be replaced. Ansul recommends replacement of links every six months. SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 23. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s): (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) 24. Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows, pul- ley tee and at ANSUL AUTOMAN release. If wire rope shows signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length. 25. Lower the tension lever to "DOWN" position. 26. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. 27. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See ► Figure 7. 4 mm) I 5 mm) j TRIP HAMMER BASE ' FIGURE 7 OOM29 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" posi- tion, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 24 and 26. 28. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-3 10-1-02 REV.3 29. If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test procedure by removing both side covers. 30. At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully down. 31. The gas valve should operate. 32. Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position. 33. Re -cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the pin in the stem engages the cocking lever. 34. Reinstall side covers on the gas valve and connect the visual indication sea] 35. Test pressure switch by completing Steps No. 1 through No. 9 on Page 6-3 in Section 6 —"Testing and Placing In Service" 36. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. 37. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 38. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. 39. Remove lock bar. 40. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated -actuator, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover and box, and secure. 41. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out - Twelve -year maintenance procedures for single, double, and let line. multiple -tank systems are as follows. 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render your fire sup- pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized Ansul distrib- utor immediately following any such clean- ing operations. At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent tank(s) must be hydrostatically tested and refilled with a fresh charge of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the agent tank. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 8. LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED FIGURE 8 000321 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). 5. From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas pip- ing union at each tank adaptor inlet line. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. 8. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove. 9. n Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid con- tact with skin or eyes. Incase of contact, flush immediate- ly with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting; ,Dilute with water or milk and contact,a. physician.' Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic con- tainer, and flush tank with clear water. 10. At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED to 330 psi (2275 kPa). Refer to "Hydrastatic Test Instructions," F-7602, for test adaptors and instructions. Verify date stamped on cartridge. The cartridge must be hydrotested at intervals not greater than 12 years. If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the cartridge must be bled down through nor- mal ANSUL AUTOMAN release operation, returned to Ansul for credit, and replaced with a charged, replacement cartridge. NOTICE Cartridge bleed down can be used to verify pneumatic accessories operation. 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 11. The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check the date code stamped on the regulator body to determine if _ the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step 12. Flow test the regulator(s) per the following: Date Code Table Month — Code Year— Code January A 1981 K February B 1982 L March C 1983 M April D 1984 N May E 1985 P June F 1986 R July G 1987 S August H 1988 T September J 1989 U October K 1990 V November L 1991 W December M 1992 Y 1993 Z 1994 A 1995 B 1996 C 1997 D 1998 E 1999 F 2000 G 2001 H a. Regulated Release Mechanism For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Figure 9. FIGURE 9 000369 SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-5 10-1-02 REV 3 For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during test. See Figure 10. FIGURE 10 000370 Pressure Switch: If pressure switch is provided, it should remain connected as part of system maintenance test. NOTICE For multiple -tank systems, one test kit (Part No. 56972) is required for each regulator in the system. b. Regulated Actuator For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Figure 11. •M'ES FIGURE 11 000371 a SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during ► test. See Figure 12. FIGURE 12 000372 NOTICE Make certain valve is closed on regulator test kit or pressure will escape before test can be performed. c. Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release mechanism and each regulated actuator provided with the system. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately 70 °F (21 °C) before test.) NOTICE Before continuing with Step d, make certain valve on test kit is closed. d. Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull station to actuate the regulated release and supply pressure to each test kit. Two styles of regulators are used with the R-102 release ► mechanisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 13) was used in R-102 systems up to approximately 1988. The pis- ton style (see Figure 13) has been used since 1988. Each style requires a slightly different flow test procedure. Use the appropriate flow test procedure as stated in Step e. DIAPHRAGM STYLE (USED UNTIL 1988) b. PISTON STYLE (USED AFTER 1988) FIGURE 13 002301 e. Flow test each regulator by completing the following steps: Diaphragm Style — The correct pressure should read 90 to 110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar) with the valve on the test kit closed and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit opened. Keep the valve opened to completely empty the pressure cartridge after pressure test has been verified. Piston Style — Open the valve on the regulator test kit. The correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi (6.6 to 8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty the pres- sure cartridge. If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu- lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating Step e. f. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). g. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mecha- nism and each regulated actuator. h. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each reg- ulated actuator. i. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator. j. Reconnect all expellant gas lines. k. Reset all additional equipment that was operated by release mechanism. 12. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See Figure 14. FIGURE 14 000366 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 13. Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from enter- ing the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling tol- erances. 14. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube assembly to tank. Firmly tighten. NOTICE Do not reinstall any tank at this time. 15. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. NOTICE Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. 16. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps. 17. Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. 18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever ► (Part No. 14995). See Figure 15. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747' Page 8-7 10-1-02 REV.3 ► 19. Raise the tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 16. 1. TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION FIGURE 16 000362 20. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. ► 21. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 17. TENSION LEVER IN "DOWN" POSITION ► FIGURE 17 001096 22. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6. FIGURE 15 23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" 000320 position. 24. Clean and return properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for one year or more must be replaced. 25. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-8 REV. 1 10-1-02 12 -YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 26. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. 27. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock bar. 28. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See ► Figure 18. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY 1 114 IN. (6A mm) MINIMUM 1 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) . . MAXIMUM TRIP HAMMER BASE ► FIGURE 18 000329 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 26 and 28. 29. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. 30. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended. 31. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. 32. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket and secure. 33. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping unions as required. Wrench tighten. 34. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 35. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- ers) and hand tighten. 36. Remove lock bar. ► 37. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regulat- ed actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fasteners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is installed in an OEMenclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure. 1'38. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-1 10-1-02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE NOTE: System options do not cover all conceivable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding, 3 -tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate. ' Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System T pe of Hardware Cartridge Reauired Cartridge Required 1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) 6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LTA -101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 28-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double (423493) (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tanks 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT 30-R (423435) 3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LTA -101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'** LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank ' Based on 5 now numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal, system. If tanks are manifolded, only a'double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. "' If tanks are manifolded, either an LT -A-101.30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. SECTION IX - APPENDIX. UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-2 REV. 5 10-1-02 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) . Total Tank Type of . Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No." Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Reauired Cartridae Reauired 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) . (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)''" LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'"" LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 56-60 6 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg:Actuator 101-30 (423443)'" LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'" LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 61-66 6 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)" Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)""' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'"" LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 67-71 7 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 67-71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT -A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)'"' LT -30-R (423435) 72-77 7 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT -A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 72-77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)""' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"- LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) ' Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 Bow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. " If tanks are manifolded, only a'double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. "' if tanks are manifolded, either an LT -A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) Total Tank Type of Flow No.* Quantity System 78-82 8 Multiple 78-82 8 (Optional) 83-88 8 83-88 8 (Optional) 89-99 9 89-93 9 (Optional) Multiple Multiple d Multiple SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-3 10-1-02 REVS Multiple Remote Mech. Release Carbon Dioxide Tyoe of Hardware Cartridge Required (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)--- 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)-- 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank ` 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'- 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)`** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)`** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 101-20 (423441) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) 94-99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) ' Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. ^ If tanks are manifolded, only a'double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manifolded, either an LT -A-101.30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. Nitrogen Cartridae R auir .d LT -30-R (423435) (2) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (4 23491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -30-R (423435) (2) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) N/A (3) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -30-R (423435) LT -A-101-30(423491) LT -A-101-30 (42349 1) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -30-R (423435) SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-4 REV. 7 10-1-02 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Tvoe of Hardware Cartrid9e Reauired Cartridge Reouired 100-110 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LT -A-101-30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) - - (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT -A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)'" LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' _ LT -A-11011-30.(423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)-'- LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT -A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator (2) 101-30 (423443) (2) LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 105-110 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)-" LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)"' LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank' nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manifolded, either an LT -A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No.423493) can be used. Options are available up to a maximum of 15 tanks. Contact Ansul Technical Services Department for detailed information. SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX Part No. Description 429853 Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN (ULC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Also) Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429856 Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN 418054 Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Solenoid and Switch in Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429850 Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Actuator and Regulator in Also) Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 429870 Stainless Steel Mounting Box Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Stainless Steel Mounting Box Also) Includes: Actuator and Regulator 429872 Two Tank Enclosure Shipping Assembly (ULC Includes: Two (2) Expellant Gas Hoses Also) Two (2) Grommets I(Bracket Stainless Steel Mounting Box 429859 24 VDC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly (ULC) Includes: 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN II -C Release Mechanism in Stainless Steel Mounting Box 1-430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly including: 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly including 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly including: 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping Assembly including: 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping Assembly including: 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly ' 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly . SECTION IX —APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-5 10-1-02 REV.5 Part No. Description 418054 OEM Regulated Electric Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Solenoid and Switch 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket 79493 OEM Regulated Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket 418691 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator Hose Bracket ' 429878 3.0 Gallon Bracket Assembly I(Bracket Only) ► 32381 101 Remote Release Assembly 418522 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator Hose 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly 56972 79694 79372 P-423429 423435 423493 423491 423439 15850 423441 '423443 419347 419345 Regulator Test Kit Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT -20-R) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT -30-R) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double -Tank) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LTA -101-30) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20) (TC/DOT) Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30) (TC/DOT) Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W) Includes: 25 1W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) 25 Blow -Off Caps Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1/2N) Includes: 9 1/2N Nozzles (Part No. 419334) 9 Blow -Off Caps SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Descri t!� ion 419346 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N) Terminal Detector Package ("Scissor") Includes: 25 1 N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) Includes: Test Link 25 Blow -Off Caps 430913 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1100) (Socket End) — to 700 °F (371 °C) Includes: 25 1100 Nozzles (Part No. 430912) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419349 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N) (Compression End) — to 700 °F (371 °C) Includes: 9 3N Nozzles (Part No. 419338) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250) 9 Blow -Off Caps 419348 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W) Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m)) Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 419337) Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m)) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419350 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230) (Part No. 79148) Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 419339) 3/8 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package 25 Blow -Off Caps 419351 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245) (Part No. 79150) Includes: 25 245 Nozzles (Part No. 419340) 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package 25 Blow -Off Caps 419352 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260) (Part No. 79146) Includes: 9 260 Nozzles (Part No. 419341) 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal' EMT Conduit Adaptor 9 Blow -Off Caps 418353 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290) Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" Includes: 9 290 Nozzles (Part No. 419342) (Part No. 79152) 9 Blow -Off Caps 419354 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120) Includes: 6 Hood Seals Includes: 9 2120 Nozzles (Part No. 419343) Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 9 Blow -Off Caps 419344 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 F) Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: 9 1 F Nozzles (Part No. 419333) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 in. 9 Blow -Off Caps 423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 1/2 in. Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569) 77695 Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 2 in. Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps 79745 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps For Standard Non -Swivel Nozzles 415568 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps for Swivel Nozzles 551265 Nozzle Aiming Device 56837 Series Detector Package ("Clip -On") 56838 Terminal Detector Package ("Clip -On") Includes: Test Link 15373 Series Detector Package ("Hinged") 15375 Terminal Detector Package ("Hinged") Includes: Test Link 417369 Series Detector Package ("Scissor") Part No. Description 417368 Terminal Detector Package ("Scissor") Includes: Test Link 415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly (Socket End) — to 700 °F (371 °C) 77285 Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670) 423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly 77287 (Compression End) — to 700 °F (371 °C) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250) 427929 Pulley Tee 15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m)) 79653 '- Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m)) 24919 Stop Sleeve Package Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317) 24918 Oval Sleeve Package Includes: 10 Oval Sleeves (Part No. 4596) 78196 1/4 in. "Quik -Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik -Seals" (Part No. 78195) 77285 3/8 in. "Quik -Seal' Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik -Seals" (Part No. 77284) 77287 1/2 in. "Quik -Seal' Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik -Seals" (Part No. 77286) 77289 3/4 in. "Quik -Seal' Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik -Seals" (Part No. 77288) 79149 1/4 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79148) 79151 3/8 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79150) 79147 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal' Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79146) 79153 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal' EMT Conduit Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79152) 423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: 6 Hood Seals 13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 3/4 in. 13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 in. 13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 1/2 in. 13710 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 2 in. SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Descrigtion 17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) ': Recharge Equipment Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 3 in. 14702 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Recharge Equipment Includes: Relay— Manual Reset 423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Recharge Equipment Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT), Includes: LT -A-101-30 Cartridge Mounting Hardware 423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 101-10 Cartridge Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT), Recharge Equipment Mounting Hardware 423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Recharge Equipment . Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT), Includes: 101-30 Cartridge Mounting Hardware 423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT), ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Mounting Hardware ► 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit 55598 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3/4 in. 55601 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Suppressant Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 in. 55604 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/4 in. 55607 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/2 in. 55610 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 in. 25937 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 1/2 in. 25938 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) Recharge Equipment Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3 in. 15733 Gas Shut-off Equipment Recharge Equipment Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly 4835 Remote Manual Pull Station — Metal Stamped (Part No. 415741) Includes: Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly Recharge Equipment 50 Ft. (15 m) of Wire Rope 24915 Break Rod Package (Part No. 415742) Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834) Recharge Equipment (Replacement) ► 427074 Trim Rings (Pack of 10) (Part No. 415743) 31809 16 in. (41 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 32335 20 in. (51 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose (Part No. 56816) 32336 24 in. (61 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose ►430815 42 in. (107 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 423429 Recharge. Equipment Includes: LT -20-R Cartridge M • 'SECTION IX —APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 9-6.1 10-1-02 REV.3 Part No. Description 423435 ': Recharge Equipment Includes: LT -30-R Cartridge 423493 Recharge Equipment Includes: Double System Cartridge 423491 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT -A-101-30 Cartridge 423439 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-10 Cartridge 423441 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-20 Cartridge 423443 Recharge Equipment . Includes: 101-30 Cartridge 79372 Recharge Equipment Includes: 3.0 Gallon (11.4 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 79674 Recharge Equipment - Includes: 1.5 Gallon (5.7 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 417911 Recharge Equipment Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting Discs 77695 Recharge Equipment Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps 24916 Recharge Equipment Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 15751) 415739 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link 165 °F (74 °C) 415740 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link 212 °F (100 °C) 415744 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 280 °F (138 °C) (Part No. 415741) 415745 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 of (182 °C) (Part No. 415742) 415746 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 °F (232 °C) (Part No. 415743) 73867 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 °F (260 °C) (Part No. 56816) SECTION IX — APPENDIX. UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6.2 REV. 2 10-1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket - "Clip -On" 53771 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage —"Clip -On" 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket — "Scissor" 415817 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage — "Scissor' 15344 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket — "Hinged" 15343 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket Linkage — "Hinged" 14985 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lock Bar 14995 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever 26310 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever for ANSUL AUTOMAN II -C 15618 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar Assembly 15240 Recharge Equipment Includes: 500 °F (260 °C) Exhaust Duct Thermometer 197 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lead and Wire Seal 418087 Recharge Equipment Includes: Installation Manual "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 16 1 - 14 (ORDERED -�" - LATELY) • 'SECTION IX —APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-7 10-1-02 REV.3 3 / 5 7 Figure Mechanical Electrical No. Description Part No. Part No. Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 429853 429856 1 Mounting Box 419293 419293 2 Basic Release w/Regulator 79140 — Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator — 79288 3 Self -Tapping Screw 71342 71342 4 Spacer 76555 76555 5 Tension Spring 79094 79094 6 Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300 79300 7 Machine Screw 14973, 14973 8 Lockwasher 7310 7310 9 Hex Nut 14732 14732 10 Caution Label 57652 57652 11 Gasket 181 181 12 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly ' LT -30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441 423435/423441 ' Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 423443/423443 13 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 77251 14 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 429864/429862 15 Hose Assembly 79007 79007 16 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label) 423744 423744 17 Solenoid Assembly — 423575 1$ Electric Snap -Action Switch — 423878 19 Cover Screw 15362 15362 20 Speed Nut 423479 423479 0=73 18 SECTION IX — APPENDIX ' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-8 REV. 3 10-1-02 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 0. 12 ,3 Figure No.., Description Part No. — Regulated Actuator Assembly 429850 1 Mounting Box 419293 2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 79340 3 Hex Jam Nut 67990 4 Hole Adaptor (2) 423277 5 Lockwasher 69521 6 Gasket 181 7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly ► LT -20-R/101-10 (Ordered Separately) 423429/423439 LT -30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435/423441 Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493/423443 ► LT -A-101-30/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423491/423443 8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 ► 9 Label 426953 10 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864/429862 11 Hose Assembly 79007 ► 12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 419294 13 Cover Screw 15362 14 Speed Nut 423479 f ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY a -■ 3 2- Figure 0 IZ2 Descri t� ion — Enclosure Shipping Assembly 1 Enclosure 2 Cover 3 Nameplate 4 Screw 5 Speed Nut . SECTION IX —APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-9 8-1-01 REV.3 Part No. 429870 419295 419296 429871 15362 423479 SECTION IX — APPENDIX' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10 REV. 3 10-1-02 BRACKET ASSEMBLY i m a 000376 ► Figure No. Description Bracket Shipping Assembly 1 Bracket Assembly 2 Grommet 3 Grommet 1.4 Wing Nut 3.0 Gallon Part No. 429878 14089 8688 12065 TANK ASSEMBLY Figure Description — Tank Assembly 1 Pickup Tube Assembly 2 O -Ring 3 Vent Plug Assembly 4 Union Nut 5 Union Tail Piece 6 Shell 7 Nameplate 8 Burst Disc L 6 7 -► • SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 ' Page 9-10.1 10-1-02 REV 1 3 f 2 W0375 1.5 Gallon 3.0 Gallon Part No. Part No. 429864 429862 429883 417700 56909 56909 74247 74247 417705 417705 417706 417706 429861 429862 N/A. N/A 418974 418974 SECTION IX – APPENDIX. UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10.2 REV. 1 10-1-02 REMOTE RELEASE 13 19 (ORDERED SEPARATELY) Part No. 32381 15954 17441 15368 15053 79094 12042 14973 14732 7310 15443 14970 15834 15362 15956 14972 79280 15396 181 (TC/DOT) 423439 (DOT) 15850 7 de 15 N2, 16 17 4 3 12 Figure No. Description — Remote Release 1 Mounting Box 2 Cover 3 Ring Pin Assembly 4 Pop Rivet 5 Spring 6 Speed Nut 7 Machine Screw 8 Hex Nut 9 Lockwasher 10 101 Release 11 Spacer 12 Screw 13 Machine Screw 14 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 15 Bushing 16 Cap Screw 17 Angle Bracket 18 Gasket 19 101 Cartridge Part No. 32381 15954 17441 15368 15053 79094 12042 14973 14732 7310 15443 14970 15834 15362 15956 14972 79280 15396 181 (TC/DOT) 423439 (DOT) 15850 7 de 15 N2, 16 17 4 3 12 1 CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES � PHONE # 407-302-1091 * FAX #: 407-330-5677 j DATE: — I I 2— PERMIT r v ! BUSINESS NAME /PROJECT: �� _ ADDRESS: PHONE NO.: "y0 FAX NO.: CONST. INSP. [ ] C / O INSP.:[ ] REINSPECTION [ ] PLANS REVIEW F. A. [) F, S. [ ] HOOD [ ] PAINT BOOTH [) BURN PE MIT [ ] TENT PERMIT[ ] TOTAL FEES: $ TANK PERMIT [ ] OTHER 4v -,j PER UNIT SEE —4,,eg 9,: s COMMENTS: Address / Bldg. # / Unit # Square Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone # -407- 330-5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that I will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances 3( of the City of Sanford, Florida. A 1 n A AN RIVE 4 'M,. RN . .